20.10.2014 Views

Technical Specifications - UNDP

Technical Specifications - UNDP

Technical Specifications - UNDP

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

ATLAS 57544 : Construction of Mental Health Center in Nablus City<br />

<strong>Technical</strong> <strong>Specifications</strong><br />

1


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />

LIST OF CONTENTS<br />

SECTION TITLE PAGE<br />

1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 3<br />

2 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK 8<br />

3 CONCRETE WORK 11<br />

4 NATURAL STONE WORKS 24<br />

5 BLOCKWORK 33<br />

6 ROOFING 36<br />

7 PLASTER WORK 39<br />

8 WALL AND FLOOR TILING WORKS 44<br />

9 CARPPINTARY AND JOINERY 50<br />

10 IRONMONGERY 54<br />

11 METAL WORKS 56<br />

12 PAINTING AND DECORATING 59<br />

13 MECHANICAL WORKS 78<br />

14 ELECTRICAL WORKS 117<br />

2


SECTION: 1<br />

GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />

1 General<br />

This specifications are to specify the quality of materials, level of workmanship, and methods to be<br />

followed and respected in executing and maintaining Mental Health Center in Nablus<br />

which is owned by the Ministry of Health, Palestinian National Authority.<br />

2 Drawings<br />

The contractor shall be provided with a list of drawings included in this bid on page A00 of the<br />

drawings file. All expenses burned by the contractor, to execute the conditions included in this section,<br />

on the contractor own cost and his unit rates in the bills of quantity shall be deemed to include all costs<br />

and expenses.<br />

3 Bidding Documents<br />

The bidding documents complete each other and to consider the case which gives the higher quality in<br />

executing as the Engineers decides. The contractor is to consider this when he prices the bill.<br />

The contractor who participates in the bid must return all bidding documents, drawings and addenda<br />

including the pre-bid meeting, signed and stamped from his behalf. If the contractor didn’t return any<br />

of these documents with his offer, the bidding committee has the right to reject his offer.<br />

4 Shop Drawings<br />

If during executing the work or before, the Engineer found that the contractor needs shop drawings to<br />

execute a certain task, the contractor must prepare these drawings and submit them to the Engineer for<br />

approval. The Engineer has the right to instruct the contractor at any time to submit shop drawings,<br />

which the Engineer considers necessary for executing a certain task. The contractor is to abide by this<br />

instruction and don’t proceed with the task before the Engineer approves the shop drawings.<br />

The shop drawings must be fully detailed with a suitable scale and unless otherwise specified be<br />

submitted in four copies and one computer diskette copy (prepared for AutoCAD).<br />

The Engineer has within a reasonable time from receiving the shop drawings approve the drawings. If<br />

the Engineer returns the drawings with notes, the contractor shall adjust the drawings as instructed by<br />

the Engineer and resubmit to the Engineer for approval and he must point out the adjustment made to<br />

the first drawing according to the standard procedure.<br />

5 As- Built Drawings<br />

The contractor, at this own cost, shall adjust the drawing copies with him as necessary during<br />

execution of works. The contractor is required to obtain the Engineers approval on this adjustment.<br />

When the contractor hands over the works, he shall prepare a new set of drawings for the project as<br />

executed with all adjustments (if any) and submit to the Engineer for approval. When the Engineer<br />

approves the As-Built drawings the contractor shall submit one calc copy and two copies and one<br />

computer diskette copy (prepared for AutoCAD) written on it the project name and the phrase “ AS-<br />

‏.”ا لمخططات كما تم تنفيذها BUILT DRAWINGS<br />

The final payment to the contractor shall be paid according to the works actually executed as<br />

recorded in the AS-BUILT drawings mentioned above.<br />

3


6 Scaffolding<br />

The contractor shall provide, erect and maintain the needed scaffoldings to execute the works of this<br />

project. Upon completion the contractor shall remove them. The contractor is to take all the necessary<br />

safety measures related to these scaffoldings and repair any damages caused by the scaffoldings to the<br />

permanent works during the execution period.<br />

7 Protection Of Works<br />

The contractor, in the course of completing his obligation according to contract conditions, is to<br />

protect and maintain the existing borders of the area (steel angles). In case they are moved or<br />

removed, because of the contractor usage of his equipment or any other reason, the contractor is<br />

return these angles to its correct position as per the coordinate provided by the Engineer. The<br />

contractor is to cover and protect the works from the climatic conditions or misuse or negligence …<br />

etc, by providing proper barrier, covers according to the Engineer’s approval. The contractor, at his<br />

own expenses, shall repair any damages to the works caused by his negligence, or not fulfilling his<br />

obligation, according to the Engineer’s instruction and satisfaction.<br />

8 Materials And Its Equivalent<br />

All materials and goods must be according to technical specification. In no instance will<br />

environmentally harmful products, such as asbestos, dangerous wood varnishes, etc. be used.<br />

The contractor is to submit the specification and description of the materials that he intends to supply<br />

with all necessary information to the Engineer to investigate before supplying. These information<br />

include, but not limited to, trade name, manufacturer address and the contractor is to submit samples<br />

if asked by the Engineer.<br />

Wherever a trade name or catalogue number to any material or any item of work in the specification<br />

or bills of quantities or drawings, this is necessary to specify the level of specification required. The<br />

contractor can suggest alternatives for these materials provided it is with the same level of<br />

specification, and to obtain the Engineers approval.<br />

When an alternative material, other than mentioned in the contract, is approved and it was not in the<br />

same level of specification, the Engineer has the right to make suitable deduction to the unit rate of<br />

these materials. No increase to the contractor prices should be made if better materials were provided<br />

(compared to the required specification).<br />

Wherever, in the bills of quantity or specification or drawings, a trade name is mentioned or<br />

materials known by its manufacturer company or distributing company or catalogue number, it is to<br />

be automatically understood that the required is these materials or equivalent even if the phrase “or<br />

equivalent” is not mentioned.<br />

9 Samples<br />

The contractor must be always ready to submit samples for materials and workmanship according to<br />

Engineer’s instruction. The Engineer shall test and inspect these samples to determine its compliance<br />

with the technical specification and contract documents. The contractor shall execute the works<br />

according to the accepted samples and following conditions :-<br />

1. The cost of all samples shall be burned by the contractor.<br />

4


2. The contractor is to submit samples before a reasonable time of starting the work to give the<br />

Engineer time to inspect the samples and make the required tests.<br />

3. The samples shall be submitted with a letter containing all the needed information to obtain<br />

the Engineers approval.<br />

4. The samples shall be kept at the Engineers office in the site.<br />

10 Materials’ Testing<br />

The Engineer has the right to ask the contractor to accompany the required materials with a testing<br />

certificate from the source either from the manufacturer or a laboratory approved by the Engineer.<br />

The Engineer has the right to test samples from any material supplied to the site, and whenever<br />

needed, either in the lab specified by the Engineer inside the country or outside. Any materials that<br />

don’t pass the test shall be rejected.<br />

The contractor is to make for the Engineer and his assistants all necessary assistance and services to<br />

test the materials brought to site and taking samples and checking measurements and weighs and<br />

provides on his own expenses whatever need from labour, tools, materials …etc.<br />

11 The Construction specified For The Use Of The Supervision Staff<br />

The cost of the offices for the Engineer’s use shall be included in the contractor’s prices in the bills<br />

of quantity as described in the tender documents and conditions “ Condition Of Contract - Part II<br />

(Special conditions), Clause 8.1.<br />

The contractor should complete constructing the Engineer and inspectors offices within 30 days of<br />

receiving the order to start works, and during this period, the contractor must provide temporary<br />

movable offices for the use of the Engineer and supervision staff. If the contractor didn’t provide the<br />

above or didn’t provide the required services, the Engineer has the right to deduct a penalty of US$<br />

60/day for every day the contractor delays in providing the above. The Engineer shall also has the<br />

right to provide these services and needs on the contractor expenses. And all sums shall be deducted<br />

from the contractor payment and insurance whatever sum it reach.<br />

The contractor shall during the execution of works provides all the required services for the abovementioned<br />

offices including maintenance, cleaning, keeping and guarding the offices and its content<br />

at all times.<br />

The contractor shall be responsible for all the costs of the needed services of the Engineer and<br />

inspectors offices and their maintenance including electricity, water, telephone, cleaning the sewage<br />

pit, providing drinking water and all needed papers, books, files ,… for the works according to<br />

Engineer’s approval.<br />

The required offices shall be erected in the place approved by the Engineer, and shall shall stay<br />

during the execution of the works and afterwards shall becomes the property of the school. The<br />

contractor must hand it over in a good condition without any construction or architectural defects.<br />

12 Temporary Construction For The Contractor’s Use<br />

The contractor must ,from the day of the order to start works, has an existence in the site in a<br />

movable or temporary office for the use of his staff to receive the Engineer’s instruction when<br />

needed. The office shall be in the size suitable for the contractor’s needs and requirements and he<br />

must obtain the prior approval of the Engineer on this office.<br />

The warehouses needed for the contractor use sufficient to store all construction materials needed for<br />

the project including equipment and tools. These warehouses must have all the conditions required<br />

to protect the materials from the environmental conditions.<br />

5


The contractor shall be responsible to guard and maintain all the above-mentioned temporary<br />

constructions that is used by the contractor. He shall also be responsible to provide the required<br />

services for these constructions.<br />

The contractor shall bear all the costs of constructing these temporary constructions.<br />

13 Removing The Temporary Constructions<br />

All temporary constructions for the contractor use shall be kept in all times in a good condition until<br />

all stages of works are completed and finally handed over. Afterwards, the contractor shall remove<br />

all these constructions and its residuals and cleaning its locations properly so that they leave no<br />

trace. If the contractor didn’t fulfill this obligation, the Engineer has the right to execute these tasks<br />

on the contractor’s account and deduct all the expenses from the contractor’s payment and insurance<br />

with the owner, whatever sum it reach without any legal procedure.<br />

14 Temporary And Permanent Services<br />

The contractor shall ,at his own expense, redirect public services if exist (like electricity, water, …)<br />

which he found during work and according to Engineer’s directions and approval. If existing<br />

services is connected to or related to or related to the works, the contractor shall maintain and keep<br />

in place until handing over the works.<br />

The contractor shall, on his own cost, repair any damages to the public services like telephone,<br />

electrical , sewage and water services for the concerned authorities or a third party.<br />

If the concerned authority or the third party decided to repair the damages by itself, or asking any of<br />

its representatives to do so, the contractor shall born the cost of these repairs don by the concerned<br />

authority or the third party. The owner, according to the contract conditions, shall not be responsible<br />

for any claims for such actions.<br />

15 Contradiction In The Contract Documents<br />

The contract documents completes each other and in case of contradiction or ambiguity in the<br />

contract documents the contractor shall raise it to the Engineer’s attention. The Engineer shall make<br />

the appropriate decision and inform the contractor. In case of contradiction or ambiguity, as<br />

mentioned above, the contractor price shall be as recorded in the bills of quantities. In case any<br />

material or work needed to execute the works is not mentioned in the bills of quantities, the<br />

contractor has to execute these materials or works and their cost shall be deemed to be automatically<br />

included in the contractor’s price for the related item. The contractor has no right to claim any<br />

differences as a result of this.<br />

16 Site Meetings<br />

During executing the works and on a periodical base, site meetings shall be held every 2 weeks or<br />

whenever needed for the purposes to coordinate the works and to be sure that it is properly executed<br />

according to contract conditions and technical specification. Minutes of the meetings shall be<br />

prepared by the Engineer or his representative and distributed to all parties and it shall be followed.<br />

The contractor shall present in the meeting detailed of the works intended to be executed in the next<br />

two weeks, which shall be discussed and proper instruction shall be given, and these instructions and<br />

approval issued in the meeting shall be followed by the contractor.<br />

17 Daily Reports<br />

6


The contractor shall submit to the Engineer (or his representative) a daily report containing the<br />

required information on the labour (No.s & types), equipment and materials arrived to the site and<br />

works executed in that day.<br />

18 Photographs Of Progress of Works<br />

The contractor at his own expense shall submit once a month, or as the Engineers find suitable,<br />

suitable number of colored photographs in 3 copies (size 10x15 cm) for the executed works or works<br />

under progress as directed by the Engineer. The original film negative and all copies shall be the<br />

ownership of the owner, and the photos can’t be use without his approval.<br />

19 Work Schedule<br />

The contractor shall prepare (in 3 copies) and submit schedule of the work including all tasks of the<br />

subcontractors any works in the contract condition. The contractor shall keep a copy in his site office<br />

and submit 2 copies to the Engineer.<br />

The contractor has to make monthly (or as the Engineers see necessary) adjustment to the schedule<br />

according to site conditions and progress of works. Two copies of the revised schedule shall be<br />

submitted to the Engineer.<br />

20 Handing Over Works And Removing Residuals<br />

The contractor must hand over all works clean and insure removing all materials or construction<br />

residuals or rejected materials or remains in the site in general or in the buildings or nearby. The<br />

completion of the works as explained here shall be on the contractor’s expense and according to the<br />

Engineer’s approval. If the contractor didn’t fulfill this obligation, the Engineer has the right to<br />

execute these works on the contractor expense and deduct it from the contractor payments or<br />

insurance.<br />

21 Measurement Of Works<br />

The Engineering measurement shall be made for all works, all openings and intersection shall be<br />

deducted. Actual net distances shall be calculated but not exceeding the measurement reported in the<br />

drawings.<br />

22 Codes And Standards<br />

Where ever B.S. is mentioned it should be read as follows:-<br />

All building materials and equipment should be registered with an international recognized norm<br />

institution or correspond to an international recognized norm. The standards used shall be DIN, ISO,<br />

B.S. or approved equivalent.<br />

7


1 Datum And Nature Of Excavation<br />

SECTION: 2<br />

EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK<br />

The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up and maintaining a site datum level. 'Zero' datum<br />

shall be given on the site by the Engineer, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.<br />

Information pertaining to the nature of the ground may be given to the contractor, when available,<br />

but without any guarantee of correctness or accuracy.<br />

2 Setting Out<br />

Each Benchmark (B.M.) or centerline for the building and/or other constructions to be under this<br />

contract, shall be properly set out by the Contractor as shown on the Drawings and inspected and<br />

approved by the Engineer prior to commencing excavations.<br />

3 Surface Leveling<br />

All earth works on Site shall be completed before any fill is deposited. Excavations over areas of<br />

Site or filling with approved material shall be carried out where required to the levels shown on the<br />

Drawings or to such other levels as may be directed by the Engineer.<br />

4 Size And Depth Of Excavation<br />

Excavation shall be cut to the size of the foundation shown on the Drawings and taken down to the<br />

foundation levels shown on the Drawings. If, without the Engineer's written instructions, the<br />

Contractor goes down below the foundation level specified, he shall fill up the part so excavated<br />

with concrete of the same type and grade as that required for the piles as defined in Concrete Works<br />

and the Bill of Quantities at his own expense.<br />

5 Shoring Excavations And Dewatering<br />

The sides of excavations shall be supported as necessary to maintain a vertical face and/or to prevent<br />

caving-in of any nature, especially during subsequent operations. The Contractor shall be responsible<br />

for the design, supply, fixing, safety and removal of all planking, strutting and shoring required to<br />

the side of the excavation. The Contractor is responsible on the type and nature or soil to be<br />

excavated; also he is to use any equipment, including dewatering equipment, to carry out the work<br />

required by this Contract.<br />

6 Types Of Excavations<br />

Excavations shall be classified according to the nature of the materials to be removed either as<br />

excavation in rock or as excavation in earth. Excavation in rock shall be classified as including all<br />

excavations in hard and consolidated materials which cannot be removed by normal excavation tools<br />

and equipment, and which require drilling or other special means for their removal. All excavation<br />

which is not in rock shall be defined as excavation in earth.<br />

7 Required Bearing Capacity<br />

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and obtain instructions if the required bearing capacity:<br />

8


(1) is obtained at a lesser depth than that shown on the drawings.<br />

(2) is not obtained at the depth shown on the drawings.<br />

Excavation bottoms are to be approved before new work is laid on them. The Contractor is to inform<br />

the Engineer when excavations are ready for inspection. If, after approval, surfaces become<br />

unsuitable due to flooding or other causes, the Contractor shall excavate further, backfill with<br />

approved filling material and compact to approval at no extra cost to the owner.<br />

Should the soil condition, after the Engineer has been informed the excavations are ready for<br />

inspection, be such that the Engineer deems it necessary to carry out tests, the Contractor shall<br />

perform such tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any expenses incurred in the performance of<br />

such tests are deemed to be included by the Contractor in his tender.<br />

8 Preparation And Inspection Of Excavation<br />

All excavations shall be kept free of water arising from whatever source, and shall be properly<br />

cleaned out of all loose and foreign matter, leveled and rammed. The Contractor is to report to the<br />

Engineer when excavations are ready for inspection and all excavations are to be approved before<br />

any further work is done.<br />

9 Filling<br />

All filling materials shall be approved by the Engineer before being placed in position.<br />

Approved earth, sand, or any other suitable material free from rubbish shall be used to make up<br />

levels as shown on the Drawings. The material shall be placed in successive layers each having<br />

a finished thickness not exceeding 250mm before compaction, watered and compacted to at<br />

least 98% compaction ratio of the maximum dry density of the Modified Proctor test ( ASTM<br />

D-1557) prior to the placement of the succeeding layer.<br />

Any exposed side or edge of fill shall be properly and evenly graded to a slope as directed or<br />

specified. When the required quantities of approved fill are not found on Site the Contractor<br />

shall, at his own expense, obtain them from locations approved by the Engineer.<br />

Filling to make up levels under building shall be executed with approved suitable material from<br />

existing ground levels up to underside of ground floor slab, and shall be be placed in successive<br />

layers each having a finished thickness not exceeding 250mm, watered and compacted to at<br />

least 98% compaction ratio of the maximum dry density of the Modified Proctor test ( ASTM<br />

D-1557) prior to the placement of the succeeding layer.<br />

The ground surrounding the building and pavements shall be filled with approved material, fine<br />

sand and coarse materials, free of foreign materials, debris, clay lumps, organic and vegetation.<br />

a) Coarse materials :<br />

Such as sandy gravel, gravelly sand, …etc., which is the material retained on sieve no. 4, and<br />

consists of crushed rock. It shall be clean, hard, tough and free from deleterious substance.<br />

b) Fine Sand Materials<br />

Shall consist of that portion of the total aggregate/fines passes no.4 sieve, such as sand, silty<br />

sand,…etc.<br />

9


The fill materials shall consists of the combination of coarse and fine sand and conform to the<br />

following grading:<br />

Sieve Size 1/ 2 " 3/8" # 4 # 10 # 30 # 60<br />

# 200<br />

% 90-100 80-90 58-72 42-50 28-38 8-18 2-5<br />

70-100 60-85 50-75 30-60 20-40 10-25 0-10<br />

Pass 100 90-100 65-85 35-45 20-30 15-30 3-8<br />

The fine sand shall conform to the following grading:-<br />

Sieve Size # 4 # 30 # 60 #<br />

200<br />

% 100 80-100 30-50 4-8<br />

90-100 80-90 20-30 0-10<br />

Pass 100 90-100 40-90 5-15<br />

In addition, shall conform to the following physical requirements:<br />

- Minimum CBR 35 % Coarse materials, Kurkar<br />

25 % Fine sand, Sand<br />

10 Disposal Of Surplus Material<br />

All surplus excavated material not used in backfilling or leveling shall be loaded and transported<br />

elsewhere on the Site as required by the Engineer or, if not required on the Site, shall be loaded<br />

and carted away from the Site to a dump to be selected by the Contractor and approved by the<br />

Municipality at the Contractor's own expense.<br />

All rubbish arising from the Works shall be cleared away and removed from the Site as it<br />

accumulates according to the Engineer's instructions and also on completion of the Works.<br />

10


SECTION: 3<br />

1 General<br />

CONCRETE WORK<br />

All materials shall be subject to such tests as the Engineer may direct and provision for such tests<br />

shall be included in the price for such materials inserted in the Bill of Quantities or Schedule of<br />

Rates unless otherwise provided for. In case such tests required by the Engineer, an independent<br />

and officialy othorized lab shall carry out such tests and sampling.<br />

Properly representative samples of all materials to be used in the works shall be submitted by the<br />

Contractor for the Engineer's approval when required.<br />

Where tests are required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall take samples and send to a firm<br />

experienced in analysis of the material. Reports shall be submitted to the Engineer. The Contractor<br />

shall bear all expenses consequent to the provision, taking and cartage, etc. of samples, in addition<br />

to the costs of performing the tests and reporting the results.<br />

The Engineer reserves the right to reject any material which, in his opinion is objectionable in any<br />

respect, not withstanding its apparent compliance with the relevant Standards. Any such rejected<br />

material shall be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense at once.<br />

2 Formwork for Concrete<br />

The Contractor shall supply, design, erect, strike and remove the formwork and be entirely<br />

responsible for its stability and safety so that it will carry the fresh concrete and all incidental<br />

loadings and preserve it from damage and distortion during its placing, vibration, ramming, setting<br />

and curing. It shall be so constructed as to leave the finished concrete to the dimensions shown on<br />

the Drawings and of a material capable of providing the surface finish specified. In any event, the<br />

maximum permissible deflection under all loads shall not exceed 2mm or 1/600 of the free span,<br />

whichever is less.<br />

Formwork shall be of timber and / or metal and shall include all temporary concrete moulds and<br />

their supports. Bolts to be used for fixing the formwork shall be approved by the Engineer before<br />

staring the work.<br />

For concrete surfaces, which are to remain, exposed wrought formwork shall be used. Wrought<br />

formwork shall be of timber or steel framing lined with 12mm thick smooth-faced plywood or an<br />

equal lining approved by the Engineer, or of metal , suitable to obtain a fair face finish on the<br />

concrete. All external angles or fair faced in-site concrete shall have chamfers formed with<br />

15x15mm (5/8"x5/8") wrought hardwood angle fillets planted in the angles of the formwork ,<br />

unless larger chamfers are shown on the drawings.<br />

Formwork ready to receive concrete shall be thoroughly clean and the internal faces properly<br />

painted with approved shutter oil or other preparation. Joints shall be tight to prevent leakage.<br />

Wherever required and prior to placing of the reinforcement the internal surfaces of all formwork<br />

shall be treated with an approved mould oil.<br />

All formwork shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to concreting. This approval,<br />

however, does not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities.<br />

The striking of all formwork shall be carried out with the greatest of care to avoid damage to<br />

concrete .<br />

11


The formwork to vertical surfaces such as walls, columns and sides of beams may be removed in<br />

accordance with the table below although care must be taken to avoid damage to the concrete,<br />

especially to arrisses and features .<br />

Minimum periods in days for striking other formwork should be in accordance with the following<br />

table, or as directed by the Engineer<br />

Ordinary Portland Cement Concrete<br />

Slabs 3<br />

(props left under)<br />

Beam soffits 7<br />

(props left under)<br />

Props to slabs 7<br />

Props to beams 16<br />

Vertical surfaces as walls,<br />

columns and sides of beams 1<br />

Formwork, shuttering, props, or any other means of temporary or semi-permanent support shall<br />

not be removed from the concrete until the concrete is sufficiently strong to carry safely the load<br />

(dead and temporary).<br />

The Contractor shall inform the Engineer when he is ready to strike the formwork , or remove any<br />

form of temporary support , and shall obtain his written consent before proceeding .<br />

The times given for the removal of props are based on the assumption that the total live plus dead<br />

weight to be supported at the time of removal is not more than one half of the total design load .<br />

For horizontal members where the loading is to be a higher proportion of the total design load<br />

these times may need to be increased.<br />

The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the concrete work caused by or arising from<br />

the removal and striking of the forms and supports Any advice , permission or approval by the<br />

Engineer relative to the removal and striking of forms and supports shall not relieve the Contractor<br />

from this responsibility .<br />

Any work showing signs of damage through premature loading is to be entirely reconstructed at<br />

the Contractor's expense.<br />

The Contractor shall confirm positions and details of all<br />

(a) permanent fixings<br />

(b) pipes and conduit<br />

(c) holes and chases<br />

to ensure that alterations are not made without the knowledge and approval of the Engineer.<br />

The Contractor shall fix inserts or box out as required to correct positions before placing concrete<br />

, and shall form all holes and chases . He shall not cut hardened concrete without approval.<br />

3 Reinforcement for Concrete<br />

Steel reinforcement shall generally be hot rolled mild , medium or high yield steel smooth round<br />

or deformed bars complying with BS 4449 or similar approved standard .<br />

In case any other type of reinforcement is required , it shall comply with the requirements of the<br />

Particular Specification .<br />

12


All reinforcement shall be free from rust and mill scale and any coating such as oil, clay, paint etc<br />

which might impair the bond with the concrete.<br />

Manufacturer's test certificates for all classes of reinforcement shall be supplied when required.<br />

Specimens sufficient for three tensile tests and three cold-bending tests per ten tons of bars or<br />

fraction thereof and for each different size of bar shall be sampled under the supervision of the<br />

Engineer . Testing shall be in accordance with BS 4449 or other approved standard and batches<br />

shall be rejected if the average results for each batch are not in accordance with the specification.<br />

All tests should be made on the Contractor's expense.<br />

All steel is to be totally free from dirt , paint , loose rust or scale when in position ready for<br />

concreting .<br />

The Contractor shall cut and bend bars to BS 4466 and to schedule provided unless otherwise<br />

instructed by the Engineer.<br />

Straight sections of bars must be kept out of winding. The internal radius of bends shall in no case<br />

be less than four times the diameter of the bar, except for stirrups, column binders, and wall shear<br />

bars which are to be bent to fit closely around the main bars .<br />

Great care is to be taken to bend stirrups and columns binders separately and to the sizes shown.<br />

All bars will be cut and bent cold using approved machines .<br />

Lengthening of bars by welding , and rebinding of incorrectly bent bars will not be permitted ,<br />

except where requested by the Engineer .<br />

The Contractor shall provide on site facilities for hand bending to deal with minor adjustments.<br />

Unless otherwise allowed for in the particular specification splices in reinforcing bars shall be<br />

formed by lapping . Such laps in bars in any member shall be staggered. Except as otherwise<br />

indicated on the drawings the minimum overlap of lapped splices shall be 50 bar diameters or<br />

400mm whichever is greater .<br />

The steel is to be fixed in position exactly as indicated, and the bars are to be securely wired<br />

together with 1.6 or 1.4mm soft iron wire or approved spring steel clips wherever necessary to<br />

prevent any displacement during concreting.<br />

Spacers, chairs and the like , temporary or permanent , are to be used as required to ensure that the<br />

steel has the exact amount of cover indicated . No permanent spacers, may show on a surface<br />

where a fair faced concrete finish or a brushed aggregate finish are required. Type of spacers shall<br />

be approved by the Engineer before starting the work.<br />

Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum cover to the reinforcing bars is to be as listed below, or<br />

equal to the diameter of the bar, whichever is greater.<br />

Position<br />

Minimum cover - mm<br />

Main bars in internal faces of<br />

columns and beams 25<br />

Main bars in external faces of<br />

columns and beams 30<br />

Main bars in floor slabs and<br />

soffits of roof slabs 20<br />

Main bars in top of roof slabs 20<br />

Outermost bars in internal faces<br />

of walls 20<br />

Outermost bars in external faces of<br />

13


of walls 25<br />

Bars in top of ground slabs 20<br />

Bars near faces in contact with soil 40<br />

The placing of all reinforcement will be checked by the Engineer and in no case is concrete to be<br />

poured around any steel that has not been passed by him. The Contractor is to ensure that no steel<br />

is displaced from its position during the placement of concrete and until the concrete is set.<br />

The insertion of bars into or removal of bars from concrete already placed will not be permitted.<br />

Reinforcement temporarily left projecting from the concrete at the joints shall not be bent without<br />

the prior approval of the Engineer.<br />

Secondary reinforced concrete members for which no reinforcement details are given in the<br />

drawings or the Particular <strong>Specifications</strong> shall have a minimum ratio of reinforcement area to<br />

concrete area of 0.33 % .<br />

4 Concreting<br />

Cement<br />

The cement used shall be Portland Cement conforming in all respects to ASTM Standard<br />

Specification C150 , type 1 , or to BS 12 , unless otherwise required , bags shall contain<br />

50kg net + 1% .<br />

If cements other than the above are required they shall be covered fully by the Particular<br />

Specification.<br />

The Contractor shall at all times furnish the Manufacturer's statement of the above Standard<br />

<strong>Specifications</strong> together with the date of manufacture, certified by an independent agency in the<br />

country of origin approved by the Engineer .<br />

The cement shall be delivered to the site by the Contractor in the original sealed and branded bags<br />

or containers of the manufacturer in batches not exceeding 100 tons and shall be stored in a proper<br />

manner off the ground to prevent deterioration . Each batch shall be stacked separately and used in<br />

the order of delivery. No cement shall be used which has been manufactured more than twelve<br />

months prior to its proposed use on site .<br />

All cements whether stored in bulk, bags, or containers in warehouses or on site shall be sampled<br />

for testing according to ASTM C183 (Methods of Sampling Hydraulic Cements). Test samples<br />

over and above those specified shall be taken at any time if so requested by the Engineer. Testing<br />

of cement shall be in accordance with the methods required by ASTM C150 and C175 or BS 12 or<br />

any other accepted by the Engineer .<br />

Aggregates<br />

This specification covers fine and coarse aggregates other than lightweight aggregates for use in<br />

the production of concrete.<br />

When lightweight aggregates are required they shall be defined in the Particular Specification.<br />

The aggregates shall be crushed gravel or stone and shall comply with BS 882 for graded or<br />

single size aggregate and shall be obtained from any quarry in the mountains approved by the<br />

Engineer . For convenience part of Clause 5 of BS 882 (grading) including Tables 1 , 2 and 3 are<br />

reproduced herein .<br />

14


Coarse aggregate : the grading of coarse aggregate , when analyzed by the method given for sieve<br />

analysis in BS 812 shall be within the limits given in Table 1 .<br />

Fine aggregate : the grading of a fine aggregate , when analyzed by the method of sieve analysis<br />

described in BS 812 , shall be within the limits of one of the grading zones given in Table 2 ,<br />

except that a total tolerance of up to 5 per cent may be applied to the percentages under-lined. This<br />

tolerance may be split up ; for example , it could be 1 per cent on each of three sieves and 2 per<br />

cent on another , or 4 per cent on one sieve and 1 per cent on another .<br />

The fine aggregate shall be described as fine aggregate of the grading zone into which it falls ,<br />

e.g. BS 882, Grading Zone 1 .<br />

NOTE : It is intended that individual zones should not be specified in contract documents relating<br />

to concrete but that the concrete mixes should be modified to make the best use of the materials<br />

readily available .<br />

If approved by the Engineer . Single-sized aggregate to BS 882 Table 1 may only be used for<br />

reinforced concrete when combined in two or more sizes to provide a well-graded mixture<br />

approved by the Engineer.<br />

Sampling and testing of aggregates shall be as required by BS 882 and in accordance with BS 812<br />

'Methods for Sampling and Testing of Mineral Aggregates , Sands and Fillers' . All sampling shall<br />

be done by or under the supervision of the Engineer .<br />

The combined percentage of sulphates and chlorides by weight in coarse and fine aggregates shall<br />

not exceed 0.05 per cent (500ppm) of the combined weight of total aggregates.<br />

Just before use the aggregate will be washed down with potable water to reduce the content of<br />

sulphates , chlorides and other extraneous material .<br />

Table 1 : Coarse Aggregate<br />

BS 410<br />

Percentage by weight passing BS sieves<br />

Test Sieve Nominal size of<br />

Nominal size of<br />

Graded aggregate<br />

Single-sized aggregate<br />

mm 400mm to 200mm to 14mm to 63mm 40mm 20mm 14mm 14mm<br />

5mm 5mm 5mm<br />

75.0 100 -- -- 100 -- -- -- --<br />

63.0 -- -- -- 85-100 100 -- -- --<br />

37.5 95-100 100 -- 0-30 85-100 100 -- --<br />

20.0 35-70 95-100 100 0-5 0-25 85-100 100 --<br />

14.0 -- -- 90-100 -- -- 0 85-100 100<br />

10.0 10-40 30-60 50-85 -- 0-5 0-25 0-50 85-100<br />

5.0 0-5 0-10 0-10 -- -- 0-5 0-10 0-25<br />

2.36 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0-25<br />

Table 2 : Fine Aggregate<br />

BS 410<br />

Percentage by weight passing BS sieves<br />

Test Sieve Grading Zone 1 Grading Zone 2 Grading Zone 3 Grading Zone 4<br />

mm<br />

15


10.00 100 100 100 100<br />

5.00 90-100 90-100 90-100 95-100<br />

2.36 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-100<br />

1.18 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100<br />

microns<br />

600 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100<br />

300 5-20 8-30 12-40 15-50<br />

150 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-15<br />

Handling Aggregates<br />

The choice and preparation of sites for stockpiling of aggregates, the number and sizes of stockpiles<br />

and the methods adopted to prevent segregation of component sizes shall be agreed with the<br />

Engineer .<br />

Coarse aggregate shall be stockpiled in three separate gradings: 38-19mm, 19-10mm, 10-5mm .<br />

When aggregates of different gradings are stockpiled close together the stockpiles shall be separated<br />

by bulkheads .<br />

Stockpiles are to be on concrete or other hard surface sufficiently sloped so that water is not retained<br />

in the base of the stockpiles.<br />

All aggregates are to be handled from the stockpile in such a manner as to secure a typical grading of<br />

the material , care being taken to avoid crushing the aggregates and contamination with extraneous<br />

matter .<br />

Aggregates need not be stockpiled when a crushing-screening plant is used in tandem with a<br />

batching plant properly equipped with several bins for different sized aggregates having the<br />

appropriate weighing scales at such bin such that a mix of the desired gradation is obtained<br />

consistently and the whole operation is conducted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.<br />

Water<br />

Unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer, only water from potable supply system may<br />

be used for mixing concrete and other products containing cement.<br />

Similarly only potable water may be used for curing concrete and cement products during the first 24<br />

hours after pouring . Later, fresh water, or other water containing not more than 4750 ppm dissolved<br />

solids of which not more than 1000 ppm may be chlorides, may be used for curing.<br />

No additives of any kind shall be used in the concrete without the express approval in writing of the<br />

Engineer.<br />

Quality Of Concrete<br />

Concrete shall be a mixture of cement. aggregates and water as covered respectively by 4.01 to<br />

4.23 above .<br />

Where air-entrainment is required , the method to be used shall be specified in the Particular<br />

Specification .<br />

The mix proportions , workability and strengths of the various types of concrete shall conform to<br />

Table 4 .<br />

16


The terms contained in Table 4 are defined as follows: WATER/CEMENT RATIO : the term<br />

water/cement ratio means the ratio by weight of the water to the cement in the mix , expressed as a<br />

decimal fraction . The water is that which is free to combine with the cement in the mix .This<br />

includes free water in the aggregate but excludes water absorbed or to be absorbed by the aggregate .<br />

The aggregate for this purpose shall be taken in a saturated surface-dry condition .<br />

The absorption of the aggregates shall be determined in accordance with Section 4 of BS 812 or any<br />

other method approved by the Engineer.<br />

The strengths specified are for ordinary Portland cement to BS 12 or Type 1 Cement to ASTM<br />

C150; if other types of cement are specified, the required strength shall be defined in the Particular<br />

Specificatio<br />

Table 3 : Mix Proportions , Workability and Strength<br />

Grades of Concrete<br />

Minimum Works cube<br />

Strength, kg/cm2<br />

Limits of agg. /<br />

Cement ration by<br />

weight<br />

Max.<br />

Use of concrete if not<br />

Grade<br />

Agg,<br />

otherwise specified<br />

At 28 mm<br />

At 7 days<br />

Max. Min.<br />

days<br />

(A) 150 200 20 7:1 5:1 RC structures in general<br />

B-200 150 200 37 8:1 6:1 RC Foundations<br />

(B) 175 250 20 5.5:1 4:1 High load columns<br />

B-250 175 250 37 6.5:1 4.5:1 High load foundations<br />

( C) 200 300 20 5:1 3:1 High load columns<br />

B-300 200 300 37 5:1 3:1 High load foundations<br />

100 150 20 10:1 8:1 Plain concrete foundations<br />

(D)<br />

B-150<br />

Blinding layer under RC<br />

100 150 37 10:1 8:1<br />

Found.<br />

(E) 75 100 20 14:0 12:1 Mass lean<br />

B-100 75 100 37 14:1 12:1 Concrete filling<br />

Grade<br />

of<br />

Concr<br />

ete<br />

Table 4 : Mix Proportions , Workability and Strength<br />

Standard Mixes<br />

Minimum Weight of<br />

Weight of dry sand per 50 k of cement<br />

works Cube dry sand<br />

Workability<br />

Strength per 50 kg of<br />

Kg/cm2 cement 20mm max. size 37mm max. size<br />

7 days 28 days Low Med. High Low Med. High<br />

kg kg kg kg kg kg kg<br />

Max.<br />

design<br />

W/C<br />

ratio<br />

B-200 150 200 91 193 159 136 226 193 170 0.55<br />

B-250 175 250 80 170 136 113 204 170 147 0.50<br />

B-300 200 300 68 147 113 91 170 136 113 0.45<br />

Table 5 : Mix Proportions , Workability and Strength<br />

Workability<br />

17


Degree of<br />

Workability<br />

20 mm Max. size<br />

aggregate<br />

Slump Compacting<br />

mm Factor<br />

37 mm Max. size<br />

aggregate<br />

Slump Compacting<br />

mm Factor<br />

Low 13-25 0.82-0.88 13-50 0.82-0.88<br />

Medium 25-50 0.88-0.94 50-101 0.88-0.94<br />

High 50-127 0.94-0.97 101-117 0.94-0.97<br />

Use for which Concrete is suitable<br />

Simple reinforced sections with<br />

vibration<br />

Heavily reinforced sections with<br />

vibration<br />

Sections with heavily congested<br />

reinforcement where vibration is<br />

difficult<br />

In case cylinders are used for determination of concrete compressive strength in accordance with<br />

ASTM C 39, the corresponding cube strength shall be obtained by using a multiplication factor of<br />

1.2 .<br />

AGGREGATE/CEMENT RATIO : the term aggregate/cement ratio means the ratio by weight of<br />

aggregate to cement in the mix. For this purpose the aggregate is taken in a saturated surface-dry<br />

condition as for the water/cement ratio above .<br />

FINE/TOTAL AGGREGATE RATIO : the term fine/total aggregate ratio means the ratio by weight<br />

of the fine aggregate to the total aggregate in the mix expressed as a percentage . For this<br />

purpose the aggregate is also taken in a saturated surface-dry condition as for the water/cement ratio<br />

above .<br />

VOLUME OF AIR ENTRAINED : the air content expressed as a percentage by volume of concrete<br />

shall be determined by ASTM C231, 'Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure<br />

Method ' . At least one test for each 120 cubic metres of concrete shall be made .<br />

SLUMP : the slump of the freshly mixed concrete shall be determined in accordance with Part 2 of<br />

BS 1881 or ASTM C143 . At least one morning and one afternoon test shall be made and<br />

whenever directed by the Engineer .<br />

STRENGTH OF CONCRETE : Preliminary Test Cubes shall be taken from the trial mixes<br />

designed to select the job mix and shall be made and tested in accordance with Parts 3 and 4 of BS<br />

1881 .<br />

SAMPLING FOR COMPLIANCE TESTING : Works Test Cubes shall be those used for control<br />

during construction and shall be made and tested in accordance with BS 5328 PART 4:1990.<br />

Recommended Miniumn Rates Sampling<br />

Average Rate o Sampling One Sample Maximum quantity of concrete at risk<br />

( 6 cubes) per<br />

under any one decision<br />

10 m3 or 10 batches 40 m3<br />

20 m3 or 20 batches 80 m3<br />

50 m3 or 50 batches 200 m3<br />

18


The Contractor when tendering having knowledge of the source and types of cement, aggregate ,<br />

plant and method of placing he intends to use shall allow for the aggregate/cement ratio and<br />

water/cement ratio which he considers will achieve the strength requirements specified and will<br />

produce a workability which will enable the concrete to be properly compacted to its full depth and<br />

finished to the dimensions and within the tolerances shown on the Drawings and required by the<br />

Particular Specification . In any event the aggregate/cement ratio and the water/cement ratio shall<br />

not exceed the upper limits specified in Table 4 for each type of concrete. Furthermore, the quantity<br />

of cement per cubic meter of concrete shall in no case be less than the minimum specified in Table 4<br />

.<br />

As soon as possible after signature of the Contract , the Contractor shall prepare such trial mixes as<br />

required to satisfy the Engineer that the specified concrete strengths will be obtained using the<br />

materials and mix proportions in accordance with the above clauses. The proportion of cement shall<br />

be increased if necessary to obtain the strengths required.<br />

From each trial mix, six Preliminary Test Cubes shall be made and tested at 7 days and four at 28<br />

days, the test at 7 days being intended to give and early indication of possible variation from the<br />

required strength . If the difference between the highest and lowest test results from any one trial mix<br />

is more than 15 per cent of the average of the strength test results, the test is to be discarded and a<br />

further trial mix made , unless all test results so obtained are above the required strength . Separate<br />

trial mixes are required for each type of concrete. The trial mix or mixes agreed by the Engineer<br />

shall be designated job mixes and used as a basis for actual concrete production.<br />

Batching And Mixing Of Concrete<br />

All concrete shall be batched by weight and mixed mechanically. Hand mixing shall not be allowed<br />

except only upon the written permission of the Engineer .<br />

Concrete may either be batched and mixed on site or outside the site and transported thereto<br />

When mixed outside the site and transported to it, batching and mixing shall be in accordance with<br />

ASTM Specification C94 , 'Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete' .<br />

When mixed on site , batching and mixing shall be as follows :<br />

BATCHING BY WEIGHT: The cement and each size of aggregate shall be measured by weight.<br />

The water may be measured by weight or volume . The weight-batching machines used shall be of a<br />

type approved by the Engineer and shall be kept in good condition while in use on the<br />

Works. Checks are to be made as required by the Engineer to determine that the weighing<br />

devices are registering correctly.<br />

BATCHING AGGREGATE BY VOLUME: When batching aggregates by volume is allowed as<br />

and when required, the cement shall be batched by weight and the water by weight or volume. Each<br />

size of aggregate shall be measured in metallic containers the depth of which is at least equal to their<br />

greatest width. The containers shall be of such shape that their volume can be easily checked by<br />

measurement.<br />

MIXING CONCRETE: the location of the batching and mixing plant shall be agreed with the<br />

Engineer.<br />

The amount of concrete mixed in any one batch is not to exceed the rated capacity of the mixer .The<br />

whole of the batch is to be removed before materials for a fresh batch enter the drum.<br />

On cessation of work, including all stoppages exceeding 20 minutes, the mixers and all handling<br />

plant shall be washed with clean mixing water. If old concrete deposits remain in the mixer drum ,<br />

they shall be rotated with clean aggregate and water prior to production of new concrete .<br />

19


Concrete mixed as above is not to be modified by the addition of water or in any other manner to<br />

facilitate handling or for any other reason.<br />

Work In Cold Or Hot Weather<br />

Concrete is not to be mixed or placed at a shade air temperature below 2 deg .C on a rising<br />

thermometer or at a shade air temperature below 3 deg .C on a falling thermometer.<br />

When the shade air temperature is 37 deg .C and rising, special precautions shall be taken during<br />

concerting operations, such as shading of the aggregates and plant , cooling of the mixing water or<br />

other methods approved by the Engineer, so that the temperatures of the concrete when placed shall<br />

not be in excess of 39 deg .C .<br />

Fresh concrete placed at these temperatures shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun to the<br />

satisfaction of the Engineer for a period of at least 24 hours .<br />

Placing<br />

Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to its final position in any suitable manner , provided<br />

there is no segregation , loss of ingredients or contamination.<br />

It shall be placed in its final position before initial setting takes place and within 20 minutes of the<br />

addition of the water to the mixer without using any additives. In case additives will be used, the<br />

manufacturer specifications of such additives must be handed over to the Engineer to be approved<br />

before using it.<br />

The order of placing concrete shall be such as to prevent water from collecting at the ends , corners<br />

and along the faces of froms . It shall not be placed in large quantities at a given point and<br />

allowed to run or be worked over a long distance in the form .<br />

Whenever possible concrete shall be placed and compacted in even layers with each batch<br />

adjoining the previous one .<br />

The thickness of the layers shall be between 150 and 300mm for reinforced concrete and up to<br />

450mm for plain (non -reinforced ) concrete, the thickness depending on the width of forms, the<br />

amount of reinforcement and the need to place each layer before the previous one stiffens .<br />

Concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely for more than 2 meters. To convey the concrete as near<br />

as possible to its final position, drop chutes of rubber or metal shall be used for small sections and<br />

bottom dump buckets or other suitable vessels for large sections.<br />

Concrete shall be carefully compacted when placed to ensure a dense and uniform mass free from<br />

air holes and cavities . Concrete type "A" , "B"& "C" shall be compacted by vibration , whereas type<br />

'D' and 'E' concrete may be vibrated or rammed , tamped and rodded . Vibration shall be performed<br />

by mechanical or electro -mechanical vibrators . The vibrators shall be of the plunger (poker) type<br />

for insertion in the concrete: except that plate type vibrators ( external ) shall be used if requested by<br />

the Engineer .<br />

The plunger (poker) type vibratos shall have a diameter compatible with the lowest spacing of<br />

reinforcement, a sufficiently high frequency and be properly handled by experienced personnel .<br />

They hall be immersed at regular intervals close enough to vibrate all of the concrete ,<br />

but not too close to affect previously vibrated and partially set concrete . Each immersion shall<br />

continue until shortly after air bubbles cease to appear on the surface of the concrete, but shall not<br />

20


last more than 30 seconds. The vibrators shall be withdrawn gradually and vertically to ensure that<br />

no air pockets are formed.<br />

When external vibrators are used as directed by the Engineer , they shall be clamped to the forms<br />

whenever possible to avoid large impact during handling , and the forms shall be so constructed as to<br />

withstand the additional vibrations .<br />

All vibrations , compaction and finishing operations shall be completed within 15 minutes from the<br />

time of placing the concrete in its final position . Until it has hardened sufficiently to carry weight<br />

without distortion, workers shall not be allowed to walk over freshly placed concrete .<br />

Concreting of any one part or section of the work shall be carried out in one continuous operation ,<br />

and no interruption of concreting work will be allowed without the approval of the Engineer . Where<br />

beams and slabs together form an integral part of the structure they shall be poured in one operation.<br />

A record is to be kept by the Contractor on site of the time and date of placing the concrete in each<br />

portion of the works and the number and identification of the Works Test Cubes, corresponding to<br />

these portions . Such records are to be handed to the Engineer weekly during the progress of the<br />

work .<br />

If placing of concrete by pumping is required it shall be specified in the Particular Specification .<br />

Admixtures<br />

No admixtures of any type shall be used in the preparation of concrete or concrete products<br />

unless so required by the Particular Specification or unless so directed by the Engineer . In case<br />

any such admixtures are used the rates and methods of application shall be strictly in accordance<br />

with the manufacturer's instructions which must be approved by the Engineer before using it.<br />

Curing<br />

Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from rain, dust storms ,chemical attack and the harmful<br />

effects of heat , wind , flowing water , vibrations and shocks . This protection shall continue until the<br />

concrete is sufficiently set such that it is no longer damaged by these factors.<br />

The Engineer shall determine when the protection is no longer required , but in any case this shall<br />

not be less than 24 hours after the time of placing .<br />

Concrete shall be cured for at least seven days and as required by the Engineer . Curing shall be<br />

effected by the direct application of water to the surface of the concrete or by other approved curing<br />

methods or curing compounds applied in accordance with the manufacturers specifications . In case<br />

the application of such curing compounds is delayed for any reason , the concrete shall be kept moist<br />

until the application is made .<br />

Timber formwork covering the concrete shall be moistened with water at frequent intervals to keep it<br />

from drying during the curing period . Metal formwork exposed to the sun must be shaded from its<br />

direct rays , painted white or otherwise protected during the curing period .<br />

Formed Finishes<br />

1 - Basic finish<br />

General requirements :<br />

(a) Produce an even finish with a sheet material .<br />

(b) Arrange panels in a regular pattern .<br />

21


(c) Blowholes not more than about 10mm in diameter will be permitted but otherwise surface is to<br />

be free from voids honey combing and other large defects .<br />

(d) Variation in colour resulting from the use of an from discolaration due to contamination or grout<br />

leakage .<br />

The finish will be left as struck , making good or small defects will normally be permitted but only<br />

after inspection by the Engineer. All blowholes shall be filled with a matching mortar to an<br />

approved sample unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. All faces shall be protected from<br />

damage , especially arrisses .<br />

All faces shall be protected from rust marks and other surface disfigurements. Form tie holes shall<br />

be filled with a matching mortar to an approved sample accepted by the Engineer .<br />

2 - Fine finish ( Fair Face)<br />

General Requirements :<br />

a) Produce a smooth even finish with an impervious sheet metal .<br />

b) Make panels as large as is practicable and arrange to approval .<br />

c) Blowhole not more than about 5mm in diameter will be permitted but otherwise surface is to be<br />

free from voids, honey combing and other defects .<br />

d) Variation in colour resulting from the use of an impervious form lining will be permitted , but the<br />

surface is to be free from discoloration due to contamination or grout leakage .<br />

e) Concrete cover spacers shall be used only if approved .<br />

The finish is to be left as struck . Making good will not normally be permitted . All form tie holes<br />

are to be filled with a matching mortar to an approved sample . Wire form ties shall not be used .<br />

Approval of the Engineer for the position of tie holes is to be obtained before use .<br />

Quality Control Testing Etc.<br />

Prior to commencing the work the contractor shall make available on site the following minimum<br />

approved equipment kept in good condition at all times :<br />

- Six Cube moulds .<br />

- Slump cones .<br />

- Thermometer .<br />

- Any other accessories as required by the Engineer .<br />

All samples and testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer or his authorised representative<br />

either on site or in an approved testing laboratory in the area .<br />

The frequency of testing shall be as noted in the clauses of this section and whenever required by<br />

the Engineer.<br />

The works Test Cubes shall be made as follows for types of concrete (A) , (B) , and (C) :<br />

(a) At least three times weekly per mixing plant .<br />

(b) At least once for three individual parts of the structure .<br />

(c) At least once per 100 cubic meters of Concrete or fraction thereof .<br />

For types (D), and (E) concrete the rate shall be once per each 100 cubic meters or fraction thereof .<br />

At least six cubes shall be made at one time . Two of the six cubes are to be tested at seven (7) days<br />

. The remaining four cubes are to be tested at 28 days , and their average strength must not fall below<br />

22


the minimum strength specified for each type of concrete and the lowest test result shall not be more<br />

than 20% below the average of the four cubes .<br />

When the result of 7-day test is unsatisfactory , the Contractor may elect to remove and replace the<br />

defective concrete without waiting for the 28-day test . If the result of the 28-day test is<br />

unsatisfactory all concreting shall be stopped at the Contractors expense and shall not proceed<br />

further without the written permission of the Engineer .<br />

The Contractor shall then , in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer , remove cores and<br />

test same or conduct in- insitu tests in accordance with CP 144 from or on suspect portions of the<br />

works, under the supervision of the Engineer .<br />

Concrete judged by the Engineer to be defective shall be forthwith cut out , removed and replaced at<br />

the Contractors own expense .<br />

In the event of strengths consistently higher than those specified being obtained , a reduction in the<br />

number of tests may be authorized by the Engineer .<br />

Position of Reinforcement<br />

The actual concrete cover to all steel at any point should not be smaller than the required nominal<br />

cover by more than 5mm.<br />

The effective depth of fully or nearly fully stressed tensile reinforcement should not be less than that<br />

given on the drawings by an amount exceeding 5 per cent of the effective depth of the section being<br />

considered or 5mm whichever is the greater .<br />

Ready mixed concrete<br />

Ready - mixed concrete as defined in BS 1926 , batched off the site will be used with agreement of<br />

the Engineer and shall comply with all requirements of the Contract . The quality and strength of<br />

cements shall be determined by site tests . No test results supplied by Ready-Mix Supplier shall be<br />

accepted as proof of the quality and strength of the concrete .<br />

The concrete shall be carried in purpose made agitators operating continuously , or in truck mixers .<br />

The concrete shall be compacted and in its final position within 1 hour of the introduction of cement<br />

to the aggregate or as agreed by the Engineer . The time of such introduction shall be recorded on the<br />

Delivery Note together with the weight of the constituents of each mix .<br />

When truck mixed concrete is used , water shall be added under supervision either at the site or at<br />

the central batching plant as agreed by the Engineer but in no circumstances shall water be added in<br />

transit .<br />

Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer truck mixer units and their mixing and discharge<br />

performance shall comply with the requirements of BS 4251 . Mixing shall continue for the number<br />

and at the rate of revolutions recommended in accordance with BS 4251 or , in the absence of the<br />

manufacturer's instructions, mixing shall continue for not less than 100 revolutions at a rate of not<br />

less than 7 revolutions per minute .<br />

Prior to any ready mixed concrete being ordered , the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer details<br />

of the supplier and shall arrange for the Engineer to inspect the supplier's works if required .<br />

Truck-mixer units shall be maintained and operated strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's<br />

recommendations .<br />

23


1 General<br />

SECTION: 4<br />

NATURAL STONE WORKS<br />

Contractor must submit two sets of each type of stone, full size units as selected by the Supervising<br />

Engineer to the project site, in sufficient number to indicate the full range of color, texture and each type of<br />

the full range of color, texture and each type of finish. One of each of the duplicate samples approved by<br />

the Engineer, the other being returned to the stone supplier ,for his guidance. Colors and types of stone –<br />

dressings are as mentioned under part 2- Products, paragraph B, "Stone Schedule".<br />

The following physical data on all proposed stone shall be submitted y the supplier :-<br />

1. Analysis of mineral composition .<br />

2. Analysis of chemical composition .<br />

3. Thermal sufficient of expansion .<br />

4. Absorption<br />

5. Specific Gravity .<br />

6. Modulus of Rupture<br />

7. Abrasion Resistance .<br />

Anchors : Two of each type to be incorporated in the work .<br />

Submit samples of other materials specified herein upon request by the Engineer .<br />

2 MOCK UP<br />

1. Furnish and install a typical stone wall, application required for the project at area designated by the<br />

Engineer. The panel shall be constructed for Engineer's approval showing 2.0m long x 1.5m high for wall<br />

installation . Wall installation shall include a corner condition indicating a jamb, sill, lintel and coping<br />

stones, etc., as shall be instructed by the Supervising Engineer.<br />

2. All work shall include setting and jointing of all stone including final cleaning as specified here in for<br />

the actual work and as required for approval Construct as many mock-ups until approval by the Engineer<br />

has obtained .<br />

3. The approved mock-up shall constitute the quality of work to be expected throughout the entire project,<br />

and shall remain in place for visual inspection until no longer needed as directed by the Engineer. The<br />

removal and disposition of the moc-ups shall be done by the Contractor at his expense without additional<br />

cost to the owner .<br />

GUARANTEE / WARRANTY<br />

Attention is directed to the provisions of the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT regarding guarantees /<br />

warranties for the Work .<br />

All warranties / guarantees to be issued by the Supplier, Manufacturers and sub-contractors shall be<br />

counter-signed by Main Contractor and both of them will be liable for repair / replace the items / works,<br />

etc., during the warrantee / guarantee period.<br />

STANDARDS<br />

A. Applicable provisions of the following standard publications shall apply throughout the work :<br />

1. Building stone Institute : "Recommended Practices for the use of Natural Stones in Building<br />

Constructions" .<br />

24


2. American Welding Society (AWS): DI.1 Structural Welding Code.<br />

3. Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI): Handbook of Bolt, Nut and Rivet Standards .<br />

REFERANCES<br />

A. National standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized quality only. Equivalent<br />

quality and testing standards will be acceptable subject to their timely submission, review and<br />

acceptance by the Engineer.<br />

QUALIFICATIONS<br />

A. Supplier / Fabricator: A firm having an adequate supply of the specified type of stone and an annual<br />

rated production capacity to deliver the stone to the project site on schedule within a time limit<br />

established by the Engineer, as required, to assure no delay in the progress and completion of the<br />

Work.<br />

B. Installer: A qualified stone layer with a minimum of five years successful experience in the erection<br />

of stonework.<br />

DESING CRITERIA<br />

A. The method of erecting, installing and anchoring of all atone work shown on the Drawings is<br />

diagrammatic only, and is not to be used for the purpose of bidding or construction. It shall be the<br />

responsibility of the contractor to design and guarantee the mechanical fixation of the stone to the<br />

concrete structure, the permanent anchorage, and the watertight sealing of all stone work . The<br />

installation shall be designed to allow for expansion, contraction and differential deflection of<br />

supporting floors of the building structure . All fastenings into stone, such as plates, bolts, anchors,<br />

shelf angles, inserts, etc. are to be galvanized steel.<br />

B. Design and calculations for stone anchor system shall be based on a minimum safety factor of five<br />

for aspects related to stone strength and anchor strength in masonry or concrete.<br />

C. Allowable stresses in stainless steel anchor elements shall not exceed the following :-<br />

1. Tension , bending 0.6 Fy<br />

2. Shear 0.4 Fy<br />

D. Anchor stone elements to withstand a total temperature variation of 125 degrees F.<br />

DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING<br />

1. Packing and Loading : Finished stone shall be carefully packed and loaded for shipment using all<br />

reasonable and customary precautions against damage in transit no material which may cause<br />

staining or discoloration shall be used for blocking or packing .<br />

2.Site Storage : Upon receipt at the building site or storage yard, the stone shall be stacked on timber or<br />

platforms at least 100mm above the ground , and extreme care shall be taken to prevent staining<br />

during storage . If storage is to be for a prolonged period , polyethylene or other suitable plastic film<br />

shall be placed between any wood and finished surfaces, and shall be used also as an overall<br />

protective covering.<br />

25


3.Defective Stone: Any piece of stone showing flaws, cracks, or imperfections such as vents, sand and<br />

clay holes, shelly bars, shakes, mottle, seams or starts upon receipt at the storage yard, or at the<br />

building site, shall be discarded and removed from the work site, at the contractor's own expense .<br />

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS<br />

A. The following environmental requirements are applicable to stone set in mortar, and when caulking<br />

stone joints with sealant:<br />

1. During freezing or near freezing weather provide equipment and cover to maintain a minimum of 4<br />

degrees C and to protect stone work completed or in progress .<br />

2. At end of working day, or during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with waterproof<br />

coverings, securely anchored .<br />

3. Maintain materials and surrounding air to a minimum 10 degrees C prior to, during and 48 hours after<br />

completion of work .<br />

3 PRODUCTS<br />

STONE MATERIALS AND FABRICATION<br />

General<br />

1. Stone shall be of good quality, sound, free from cracks and defects, seams or starts which may impair its<br />

structural integrity, durability, appearance or function. Colour, texture and finish shall be within the range<br />

of samples approved by the Engineer .<br />

2. All stone shall be obtained from quarries having adequate capacity and facility to meet the specified<br />

requirements. Cutting and finishing shall be performed by using approved equipment to process the<br />

material promptly on order and in strict accordance with the specifications . Evidence to this effect shall be<br />

provided by the contractor's.<br />

3. Stone rejected for noncompliance with the submitted samples or the requirements of this specification<br />

shall be replaced with material acceptable to the Engineer. Replacement shall be prompt and at the<br />

Contractor's own expense. Inspection of stone by the Engineer shall not relieve the contractor of his<br />

responsibilities to perform all work in accordance with the Documents.<br />

STONE SCHEDULE<br />

Refer to the Drawings for locations, sizes and herein . All stone work shall be carried out and executed in<br />

accordance with the classifications of class " Special refer to clause 1.06, item A/1. Stone Type<br />

Application/ Thickness / Finish<br />

Application: Exterior and Interior – Special Shapes include, but not limited to:<br />

- Rebated and Splayed sills-Splayed copings with rounded edges – Splayed and mitered copings .<br />

- Corner stones – Quoins<br />

- Splayed coping quoins<br />

- Other, all as shown and / or noted in the drawings and in the Book of Details (Jordanian Code)<br />

Thickness : As noted on the relevant details / drawings .<br />

Finish : Mosamsam, Mattabeh and Tubza dressing, as noted on the drawings and details .<br />

FINISH<br />

26


1. The finish , of exposed to view surfaces of stone , shall be as specified above . The concealed from view<br />

surfaces of all stone types shall be sawn , hacked and / or roughened to allow key for the backing mortar ,<br />

all as more particularly instructed by the Engineer .<br />

2. End match the texture in the face of stone elements that abut one another to assure continuity in surface<br />

appearance .<br />

STONE FABRICATION – GENERAL :<br />

1. Fabrication of stone shall be in strict accordance with approved shop drawings for fabrication, and with<br />

this specification .<br />

2. To the maximum extent possible, fabrication and assembly of stone shall be executed in the shop. Work<br />

that is not shop assembled shall be shop fitted .<br />

3- All work shall be of the highest quality, in accordance with the best trade practices, and performed by<br />

skilled workmen. All materials and workmanship shall conform to the highest industry standards.<br />

4- Use no materials, equipment, or practices that may adversely affect the functioning, appearance, or<br />

durability of the stone work or work trades.<br />

DIMENSIONS<br />

1- Cut all stone work accurately to shape and dimensions shown on the final approved shop drawings.<br />

Exposed plans surfaces shall be true . Bed and joint surfaces shall be dressed straight and at right angles to<br />

the faces, unless otherwise shown. Exposed arise lines shall be sharp and true. Patching of stone will not be<br />

permitted.<br />

2- Do all necessary cutting for anchors, support plates, shelf angles, and dowels, etc .<br />

BEDS AND JOINTS<br />

Stone beds and joints surfaces shall be cut square from the face for the entire thickness of stones. Stone<br />

shall be bedded and jointed including the various expansion joints dimensions as shown on the approved<br />

shop drawings .<br />

BACKS OF PIECES<br />

Backs of all pieces of stone receiving no concrete backing shall be sawn to approximately true planes with<br />

a maximum variation of 1.5mm in thickness from that indicated on the approved shop drawings .<br />

EXTERIOR & INTERIOR SPECIAL SHAPES<br />

All specially shaped pieces of stones shall be constant in profile throughout their length , in strict<br />

conformity with details shown on approved shop drawings .<br />

INCIDENTAL CUTTING & DRILLING<br />

1- Provide holes, grooves, sinkages and recesses, etc., as applicable, for anchors, plates, bolts, shelf anchor<br />

supports, inserts, etc., other cutting and drilling shall be provided only when specifically Shown on the<br />

approved shop drawings .<br />

2- Holes for lifting will not be permitted on any stone element with a thickness of 51mm or less .<br />

27


3- No cutting or drilling will be permitted on exposed surfaces .<br />

4 MORTAR MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES<br />

Cement<br />

1- Cement for Setting Mortar: Non – Staining Portland Cement conforming to ASTM CI50, Type I except<br />

containing not more 0.03% water soluble alkali. Turkish cement will not be permitted.<br />

2- Cement for Pointing Mortar: Non-staining white Portland Cement conforming to ASTM CI50.<br />

Grey nonfattening cement may be used for pointing mortar if the colour of pointing mortar, as selected by<br />

the Supervising Engineer, does not require white Portland Cement.<br />

Water<br />

Water shall be potable, clean and fresh from public water system .<br />

Sand<br />

Well graded non-staining masonry sand conforming to ASTM C1 44. Use white Silica sand pointing<br />

mortar. No other Sand shall be permitted for mortar or grout unless otherwise tested and approved by the<br />

Engineer.<br />

Lime<br />

Approved brand of plastic hydrated, such as New England 4x, conforming to ASTM C207, Type "S"<br />

Integral Waterproofing<br />

Integral liquid waterproofed for concrete and mortar , manufactured by an approved manufacturer and<br />

conforming to ASTM C494 .<br />

Integral Color<br />

Super permanent, manufactured by an approved manufacturer and conforming to BS 1014 .<br />

Mortar Plasticiser<br />

As manufactured by an approved manufacturer and conforming to BS 4887 .<br />

5 STONE ANCHORAGE – MATERIALS<br />

General<br />

All stone anchorage in contact with stone shall be fabricated from approved galvanized steel.<br />

Gravity anchors<br />

Wherever possible and appropriate stone shall be supported by gravity anchors . The Type location and<br />

number of gravity anchors. shall be determined by calculations , recommended practices of the BST .<br />

Lateral Anchors<br />

28


The type, location and number of lateral anchors shall be determined by calculations, applicable codes, and<br />

recommended practices of the BSI.<br />

Dovetail Anchor Slots<br />

Fabricate from not less than 6 ga. Galvanized steel . Provide dovetail anchor slots with filler strips<br />

Anchorage Tolerances<br />

Stone anchors shall be sufficiently adjustable to overcome expected variations in the building frame and in<br />

the stone itself, and in both in combination.<br />

6 EXECUTION<br />

Conditions At Site<br />

1. The Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the stone installation, examine all surfaces and parts of the<br />

structure to receive stone work, and notify the supervising Engineer in writing of any conditions<br />

detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with installation until such<br />

conditions have been corrected and are acceptable to the Engineer .<br />

2. Verify all measurements and dimensions, coordinate the installation of inserts for this work and<br />

coordinate and schedule this work with the work of other trades. Give particular attention to the location<br />

and size of cutouts required to accommodate mechanical, electrical, and other work or adjoining<br />

construction, in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings for such trade.<br />

Stone Installation<br />

1. Anchors, Brackets and Angles : Securely fix in place all supporting anchors, inserts, brackets, angles<br />

and other items requiring building into concrete , provide location drawings in sufficient time so as not to<br />

delay job progress .<br />

2. Preparation for stone Installation : Clean stone prior to setting , leaving edges and surface free from<br />

dirt and foreign mistrial . Do not use wire brushes or implements which mark or damage exposed surfaces,<br />

unless otherwise approved by the Engineer .<br />

C- Mortar And Grout Proportioning – By Volume<br />

1. General:<br />

Mortar and grout proportioning shall be prepared and tested by the contractor, and in addition the<br />

contractor shall allow for preparing and testing the motar and grout mixes included within this section to<br />

meet the Engineer's satisfaction and approval.<br />

2. Setting Mortar for Stone:<br />

1. Portland Cement - 1 part<br />

2. Hydrated lime - 0-0 .25 part<br />

3. Sand - 3 Parts<br />

4. Plasticiser<br />

5. Integral water proofer<br />

3. Pointing Mortar :<br />

29


1. White Portland cement - 1 part<br />

2. Sand - 1-1/2 parts<br />

3. Add color additive to acquire the color of mortar approved by the supervising Engineer.<br />

4. Add water proofer<br />

Add integral waterproofing admixture to setting and pointing mortar in the quantity and manner<br />

recommended by the manufacturer.<br />

Generally, only approved mortar plasticiser shall be used in all mortars, unless otherwise instructed by the<br />

Supervising Engineer.<br />

4. Wall Grout<br />

Fine grout shall be mixed in the following proportions by volume all in accordance with ASTM C476:<br />

1. Portland Cement- 1 part<br />

2. Hydrated Lime - 0 .1 part<br />

3. Sand - 2.25-3 parts<br />

Coarse grout, where required, shall be mixed in the following proportions by volume, all in accordance<br />

with ASTM C479:<br />

a- Portland Cement - 1 part<br />

b- Hydrated Lime - 0.1 part<br />

c- Fine Aggregate - 2.25 parts<br />

d- Coarse Aggregate - 1-2 parts<br />

Use sufficient water to produce a fluid, pourable consistency.<br />

3. Mortar And Grout Mixing<br />

1- Mortar and grout shall be machine mixed. Cement and hydrated lime may be batched by the bag. Sand<br />

preferably shall be batched by weight, but subject to the approval of the Supervising Engineer may on<br />

certain small operations be batched by volume in suitably calibrated containers, provided proper allowance<br />

is made for weight per cubic foot, contained moisture, bulking and consolidation, shovel measurement shall<br />

not be used.<br />

2- Workability or consistency of mortar on the board shall be sufficiently wet to be worked under the<br />

trowel. Water for tempering shall be available on the scaffold at all times. Mortar and grout which has<br />

begun to "set" shall be discarded. Mortar and grout which has stiffened due to evaporation shall be<br />

retempered to restore its workablility. Retempering of mortar and grout at the mixer shall not be permitted.<br />

4. Setting of Extertior and Interior wall Stone<br />

1- All setting shall be done in accordance with the approved shop drawings. All work shall set in a rigid<br />

and substantial manner, straight and plumb, with all horizontal lines level and all vertical lines plumb,<br />

unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Similar abutting profiles shall accurately intersect and be in true<br />

alignment. All joints shall be uniform and shall be of the size and detail shown on the approved Shop<br />

Drawings.<br />

2- Except as otherwise indicated and as herein specified. All anchoring devices shall be accurately set and<br />

adjusted. Holes and slots for anchoring devices shall be filled completely with mortar. Each stone shall be<br />

anchored securely in place.<br />

30


Joints noted to receive sealant shall be left void. If such joints cannot be sealed shortly after erection, they<br />

shall be taped or otherwise temporarily sealed in a manner as approved by the Engineer.<br />

3- All exterior stone joints shall be 5mm wide unless otherwise indicated<br />

4- As setting stone joints, the work shall be fastened securely to take care dead loads, wind loads and<br />

forces, and erection stresses. All units of stones shall have suitable temporary braces, shores, and stays to<br />

hold them in position until permanently secured. All bolts and nuts shall be drawn tight and the bolt<br />

threads shall be nicked to prevent the nuns from backing off.<br />

5- All welding, where required, shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer, the<br />

current edition of the "Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" of the American<br />

Welding Society (AWS Code).<br />

6- The definitions of all terms herein related to welds, welding, and oxygen cutting shall be interpreted in<br />

accordance with the "Standard Definitions, Welding, and Cutting", of the current edition of the American<br />

Society.<br />

7- Cavities behind facing stones shall be filled with fine and /or course grout, as specifically shown on the<br />

approved shop drawings and as specified herein.<br />

8- Stone elements indicated to be set with mortar joints shall be set with two cushions per stone in every<br />

horizontal joint. Stone shall be set in full horizontal mortar beds and joints raked out to a depth of 19 mm<br />

before mortar has set. The face surfaces shall not be smeared with the mortar forced out of joints or that<br />

used in pointing. No hammering, rolling or turning of stones will be allowed on the wall. Precautions shall<br />

be taken to prevent seepage of moisture, through or from the exposed surfaces.<br />

9- Build in anchors and supports all as shown on the approved shop Drawings.<br />

10- Allow stone units to set overnight and then completely fill joints with pointing mortar. Joints shall be<br />

toled flush. During the tooling of the joints, enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with mortar.<br />

Surfaces of stone shall be cleaned using sponge and water to remove mortar spills from face of stone.<br />

11- The setting of patched, chipped, cracked, broken, stained or defective stones shall not be permitted.<br />

Protection<br />

Stone shall at all times be protected from drippings, welding spatter and damage by other trades during<br />

construction. Where necessary or directed, substantial non-staining wooden or other approved covering<br />

shall be placed to protect the work . Heavy polyethylene film shall be used between stone and wood.<br />

Maintain all protection until remit final cleaning of stone work.<br />

Cleaning<br />

Clean soiled surfaces using non-acidic solution of type, which will not harm stone, mortar joint materials,<br />

or adjacent surfaces.A non-metallic tools shall be used in cleaning operations<br />

Final Inspection<br />

A. Finish surfaces shall show no objectionable visual distinction in jointing, bedding, plane, coulour,<br />

texture, pattern, and finish. All stones which in the opinion of the Engineer do not provide the required<br />

uniformity shall be relocated, or removed and replaced with new stone units to the satisfaction of the<br />

Engineer and at the contractor's own expense.<br />

31


All defective stones shall be replaced with new stones units, except that minor damages may be repaired<br />

when approved by the Engineer. Repairs, when approved, shall be completed to the satisfaction of the<br />

Engineer. When the repairs to stone are unsatisfactory to the Engineer, the stone shall be replaced with<br />

new stone. All repairs and all replacements of defective and unsatisfactorily repaired stone shall be<br />

performed at the Contractor's own expense.<br />

32


1 Manufacture<br />

SECTION: 5<br />

BLOCKWORK<br />

Generally the blocks used shall be of local manufacture made with concrete in approved vibrated pressure<br />

machines. The fine aggregate to be used for blocks shall be clean and sharp approved sand . It shall be<br />

chemically and structurally stable and shall comply with the Table of Gradings given hereunder . The<br />

cement, coarse aggregate and water to be used for blocks shall comply with the requirements given for<br />

Concrete Works, and the methods of measuring and mixing the material shall be the same. The following<br />

Mixing Table shall be strictly adhered to in all cases . Water/cement ratio shall be strictly governed to<br />

produce a mix of nil - slump.<br />

Mixing Table<br />

Nominal Mix (all by volume)<br />

1 part Cement, 2 parts Fine Aggregate and 5 parts Coarse Aggregate<br />

Table Of Grading<br />

(a) Fine aggregate<br />

BS 410<br />

Approximate size: Percentage(by weight) Passing<br />

Sieve No<br />

mm<br />

BS sieve<br />

-- 10.00 100<br />

-- 5.00 90-100<br />

7 2.36 75-100<br />

14 1.18 55-90<br />

25 0.60 35-59<br />

52 0.30 8-30<br />

100 0.15 0-10<br />

b) Coarse aggregate 10mm single size aggregate .<br />

The blocks shall be hard, sound, square and clean with sharp well defined arrises and shall, unless<br />

previously approved by the Engineer, be a work size of (400 x 200 x 200mm) with properly formed half<br />

blocks for bonding .<br />

Hollow blocks, where required, shall be similar quality and overall size to solid blocks , and shall be of<br />

local manufacture made with concrete as described above in approved vibrated pressure machines . The<br />

design of the cavities and webs shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before manufacture . The<br />

thickness of the membranes or solid portions of hollow blocks shall be not less than (30 mm) each and the<br />

combined thickness of the solid portion shall exceed one third of the total thickness in either horizontal<br />

direction (Light weight lime - blocks can be used according to drawings, bills of quantities and Engineer’s<br />

approval)<br />

Arrises shall be sharp and true; blocks which have damaged arrises are not to be used in the works and shall<br />

be discarded at the expense of the Contractor.<br />

33


Immediately after moulding the blocks shall be placed on clean , level, non-absorbent pallets . Blocks shall<br />

not be removed from the pallets until inspected and approved by the Engineer. Blocks shall be cured by<br />

being kept thoroughly wet by means of water sprinklers or other approved means for a period determined<br />

by the Engineer but in all cases for not less than three days . Blocks must not be left on earth or sand during<br />

the curing process. Blocks shall be stacked in honeycomb fashion. Solid stacking will not be permitted.<br />

The average crushing strength of solid or hollow blocks shall be not less than 35 kg/cm of gross area<br />

(average of 12 blocks) .<br />

2 Mortars<br />

The sand to be used for mortar shall be clean and sharp . It shall be chemically and structurally stable and<br />

shall comply with the Table of Gradings below . The lime if used for mortar shall be hydrated lime<br />

complying with BS 890 .<br />

Where colored mortars are required these shall be obtained either by the use of coloured cement or by<br />

addition of pigments complying with BS 1014 .<br />

The cement and water to be used for mortar shall comply with the requirements given under Concrete<br />

Works Section, and the methods of measuring and mixing shall be the same . The following Mixing Table<br />

shall be strictly adhered to in all cases .<br />

Mixing Table<br />

Nominal Mix Cement Kilos Sand m3<br />

1:4 360 1.00<br />

Lime (Dry Hydrate )<br />

Kilos<br />

as approved by the<br />

Engineer<br />

Table Of Grading<br />

BS 410<br />

Approximate size:<br />

Sand Passing Through<br />

Sieve No<br />

mm<br />

Sieve: percentage<br />

-- 3 95-100<br />

7 2.4 80-100<br />

14 0.2 60-100<br />

25 0.6 30-100<br />

52 0.3 5-65<br />

100 0.15 0-15<br />

200 0.08 0-5<br />

Note : the above figures represent the limits of percentages (by weight ) passing sieves of the sizes<br />

mentioned .<br />

The mortar generally shall be cement and sand (1:4) mix .<br />

Where plasticiser is added to the mortar the following mixes shall be used:<br />

(a) Building mortar - cement and sand (1:6) and<br />

(b) Mortar for pointing - cement and sand (according to plasticizer manufacturer<br />

recommendation)<br />

34


The plasticiser shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and subject to the<br />

Engineer's approval.<br />

All mortars shall be used before the initial set has begun. Mortar shall not be remixed after the initial set<br />

has taken place . The full description given under Plaster Work Section , shall apply also to the measuring ,<br />

mixing etc. of mortar for blockwork .<br />

3 Construction<br />

All blockwork shall be set out and built to the dimensions shown on the Drawings .<br />

Walls shall be carried up regularly without leaving any part more than one meter lower than another unless<br />

the permission of the Engineer is first obtained. Work which is left at different levels shall be racked back.<br />

In the case of cavity walls , both thicknesses shall not be carried up more than about 400 mm .<br />

The courses of blockwork shall be properly leveled . The perpen-dicular joints shall be properly lined and<br />

quoins, jambs and other angles plumbed as the work proceeds .<br />

All walls shall be thoroughly bonded in accordance with the best constructional practice and as directed by<br />

the Engineer. Broken blocks shall not be used except where required for bond (if approved by the<br />

Engineer).<br />

All concrete blocks shall be soaked with water before being used and the tops of walls left off shall be<br />

wetted before work is resumed . The faces of walls shall be kept clean and free from mortar droppings and<br />

splashes<br />

All blocks shall be properly spread with mortar before being laid and all joints shall be thoroughly flushed<br />

up solid through the full thickness of the wall at each course as the work proceeds .<br />

For block walls the gauge shall be ten courses to 2100 mm .<br />

Walls to be left unplastered shall have a fair face consisting of selected blocks pointed with a neat<br />

weathered or flush joint as the work proceeds using the same mortar mix as for jointing .<br />

Walls to be plastered shall have the horizontal joints raked out to depth of 8 mm to form a key.<br />

Blockwork shall be bonded to concrete columns and the like with 200 x 60 x 6 mm non ferrous metal ties<br />

cast in concrete and subsequently bent down , ragged and built into every 2 courses of blockwork. Gunning<br />

ties to concrete will not be permitted (other ways of bond must be approved by the Engineer) .<br />

35


SECTION : 6<br />

ROOFING<br />

1 Corrugated Steel Roofs<br />

All corrugated galvanized steel sheeting (whether fixed to wood or steel framing) shall be of 23 or 24<br />

gauge fixed with a minimum of 50mm end laps and with a minimum of one corrugation side lap .<br />

When instructed to have a one corrugation side lap, the sheets shall have a cover of not less than 20mm<br />

and all the lapped sides shall be turned downwards. Where practicable the exposed lapped sides shall be<br />

arranged to face away from the prevailing wind. When instructed to have a one and a half corrugations side<br />

lap the sheets shall be arranged alternatively with a cover of not less than 90mm, the first sheet being<br />

fixed with the lapped sides turned upwards away from the bearer and the cover sheet with the lapped<br />

sides turned downwards .<br />

Sheets shall be secured to purlins at centres not exceeding 300mm by galvanized self parking screws<br />

(minimum 75mm long) with galvanized diamond shaped washers and lead sealing washers<br />

All holes for bolts, self parking screws etc. shall be punched from the underside of the sheets and shall be<br />

on the crown of the corrugations .<br />

Galvanised steel ridge capping shall be supplied and fixed to purlins as described above .<br />

Hook bolts, self parking screws and washers shall generally comply with BS 1494 .<br />

2 Screeds<br />

The provisions of Concrete Work section shall apply to the construction of solid reinforced concrete slab<br />

roofs and to hollow slab roofs. The actual finish will be specifically shown on the Drawings or in the<br />

Particular Specification.<br />

Lightweight concrete screeds for obtaining falls or as an insulation layer shall be of approved type of<br />

foamed concrete. The materials shall be measured, applied and cured in accordance with the manufacturer's<br />

instructions and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.<br />

In all cases the finished screed shall be of an approved proprietary type with a density of not less than<br />

400kg/ m2 to receive the applied roofing . Mixing shall take place using approved mechanical mixers.<br />

Concrete screeds for obtaining falls shall be (1:3:6) mix.<br />

All screeds shall be laid in bays not exceeding 10 square metres and formed between stop boards of the<br />

correct height and cut on each side to indicate the slope required in the roofing . The screed shall then be<br />

trowelled with a wooden float to true and accurate falls or cross falls up to the stop boards . A 10mm side<br />

gap shall be left between each screed bay for the full depth of the screed. The screeds shall be allowed to<br />

cure thoroughly to attain maximum shrinkage. Any cracks which appear due to shrinkage shall be made<br />

good . The gaps between bays shall then be filled in with cold bitumen.<br />

Where the roof screeds are to be reinforced with one layer of galvanised wire mesh , this shall be supported<br />

on top of the base on spacers to ensure that it is maintained at between 10mm and 15mm below the top of<br />

the finished screeds . It shall be at least 100mm wide, securely wired together .It shall be stopped 20mm<br />

from the edge of each bay.<br />

3 Insulation<br />

When asphalt sheets is used on the top of the screeds, it should have the following properties:<br />

36


−Asphalt sheets should be supplied in rolls of 1-1.2 m width and 4mm thick.<br />

−Top surface should have a layer of medium size white aggregates (2-3mm)<br />

Applying asphalt sheets should be made according to the manufacturer instructions.<br />

Top surface of screeds should be cleaned and a suitable prime should be sprayed before using asphalt<br />

sheets.<br />

An overlap of 15-20cm should be made on sheets.<br />

Hot asphalt should be sprayed before erecting the sheets, which should be heated (bottom side).<br />

Sheets should have at least 15cm vertical edges, all around the roof (a special groove should be made in the<br />

roof parapet to erect the vertical side of the sheets)<br />

During erecting asphalt sheets, contractor should prevent air pockets entrained under the sheets, which will<br />

be full flame applied.<br />

4 Tiling<br />

Tiled finishing to roofs shall be manufactured and laid as described in Section P (Plasterwork etc..)<br />

Tilted tiled skirting shall include a triangular fillet of screed material and pointing at top with polysulphide<br />

mastic.<br />

5 Expansion Joints<br />

The expansion joints shall generally be of 10mm thick fibreboard impregnated with bitumen accurately cut<br />

, with butt joints and fixed vertical and straight .The top 10mm of the joint shall be filled with a grey<br />

polyurethane gun grade sealant which confirms with BS 4254.<br />

Expansion joints shall continue into the tilted tile, skirting and fillets .<br />

6 Felt Roofing<br />

Felt roofing, below tiling , shall be two-ply, tropical grade, fibre- based bituminous roofing felt weighing<br />

not less than 1.8kg /m2 and shall comply generally with BS 747 (Class 1 Type 16 ) and shall be executed<br />

by an approved specialist .<br />

The felt shall be thoroughly bonded to the roof or screed and between layers. Care shall be taken to ensure<br />

that all surfaces upon which felt is to be laid are dry, smooth and clean .<br />

The bonding shall be by means of bitumen (60 /70 penetration) applied hot as a continuous coating to an<br />

average thickness of not less than 1.5mm and not more than 2mm , so as to give a complete coat over the<br />

whole area at the rate of not less than 1.5kg /m2 and not more than 2.0kg /m2 for each bonding coat .<br />

The felt shall be laid with 150mm side and end laps which shall be staggered .<br />

The felt shall be carried up the walls etc., over fillets to from a skirting continuous with the roof covering.<br />

The skirting shall be bonded to the fillets and walls and shall be not less that 150mm in vertical height.<br />

Application of materials shall conform in all respects with the British Standard CP 144 : Part 1, 'Roof<br />

Coverings , built-up bitumen felt', or any standards approved by the Engineer .<br />

The felt shall be dressed and bonded into rainwater outlets and under flashings.<br />

37


7 Bitumen Roofing<br />

Where roof finishings are required to be of a bitumen and sand mix this shall be composed of a mix to the<br />

following proportion ( by weight ) :<br />

Bitumen 60 /70 penetration 13 %<br />

Filler (passing 200 sieve) 11 %<br />

Sand 76 %<br />

Mixing shall be carried out in an approved machine until all materials are thoroughly mixed. The mixing<br />

temperature shall be between 163OC and 191OC and it shall be applied at a temperature sufficient to<br />

maintain the workability of the mix. The covering shall be laid in one coat to give a consolidated thickness<br />

of 20mm after rolling with a light hand roller. 150x150mm angle fillets shall be laid at edges of roofs<br />

against parapets etc., properly bonded to the roof covering and with top edges turned into joints of walls.<br />

The covering shall also be pressed into rainwater outlets and under flashings.<br />

8 Asphalt<br />

Asphalt roofing and tanking shall be executed by an approved specialist using mastic asphalt to BS 988 .<br />

The asphalt shall be applied in the thickness and number of coats described in the Particular Conditions,<br />

with each successive coat breaking joints at least 300mm (12") and with properly formed angles, double<br />

angle fillets and fair edges .<br />

Joints of blockwork shall be raked out and all vertical surfaces hacked for key.<br />

Horizontal work shall be laid on a layer of stout sheathing felt.<br />

9 Completion<br />

On completion all roofs etc are to be left sound, water- tight and in clean condition before handing over.<br />

38


SECTION: 7<br />

1 General<br />

PLASTER WORK<br />

The British Standards (BS) govern the work covered in this section.<br />

2 Materials<br />

Portland cement, fine aggregate and water shall be as previously specified in Concrete Work section.<br />

The color pigments shall be of an approved manufacture, lime proof and non-fading.<br />

The sand for plastering shall be clean fine sand and shall be chemically and structurally stable. The sand<br />

shall be sieved and graded in accordance with the Table of Grading given below .<br />

Table Of Grading<br />

Sand Passing Through Sieve<br />

BS 410<br />

Approximate Size<br />

Percentage:<br />

Sieve No.<br />

mm<br />

UNDERCOAT<br />

FINISH COAT<br />

7 2.4 95-100 100<br />

14 1.2 80-95 95-100<br />

25 0 .6 30-55 30-85<br />

52 0.3 5-50 5-50<br />

100 0.15 0-10 0-10<br />

Note: the above figures represent the limits of percentages (by weight) passing sieves of the sizes<br />

mentioned.<br />

Imported lime shall be of the hydrate type complying with BS 890 .<br />

Bonding agents where required shall be of a type approved by the Engineer , and shall be used as<br />

recommended by the manufacturer<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that supplies of materials are sufficient to give consistent and uniform colour to<br />

surface finishes which are not to be painted.<br />

3 Mixing<br />

The methods of measuring and mixing shall be as laid down under Concrete Work section , and the<br />

proportions shall be in accordance with the Mixing Table given below .<br />

Mixing Table<br />

Nominal mix Ratio<br />

Cement Fine Aggregate or (I) ( dry hydrate )<br />

Kg<br />

Sand m3<br />

kg<br />

1:5 cement 289 1.00 -<br />

1:4 cement 361 1.00 -<br />

1:3 cement 476 1.00 -<br />

1:2 cement 577 1.00 -<br />

1:2 cement 721 1.00 -<br />

1:1 cement 1442 1.00 -<br />

1:5 cement with 20%<br />

(I)<br />

1:5:1 289 1.00 124<br />

1:4 (I) with 10%<br />

cement<br />

1:10:21/2 145 1.00 161<br />

39


* I = Imported Lime<br />

With regard to the lime mortars gauged with cement , the addition just before use of the cement to small<br />

quantities of the lime/sand mix shall preferably take place in a mechanical mixer and mixing shall continue<br />

for such time as will ensure uniform distribution of materials and uniform colour and consistency . It is<br />

important to note that quantity of water used shall be carefully controlled.<br />

4 Plastering And Similar In-Situ Finishings And Backings<br />

All plastering shall be executed in a neat workmanlike manner. All faces except circular work shall be true<br />

and flat and angles shall be straight and level or plumb .<br />

Plastering shall be neatly made good up to metal or wooden frames and skirting and around pipes or<br />

fittings. Angles shall be rounded to 5mm radius.<br />

Surfaces of undercoats shall be well scratched to provide a key for finishing coats . Screed marks or<br />

making good on undercoats shall not show through the finishing coats .<br />

Surfaces described as trowelled smooth shall be finished with a steel trowel to a smooth flat surface free<br />

from trowel marks.<br />

Surfaces described as floated shall be finished with a wooden or felt float to a flat surface free from trowel<br />

marks .<br />

All tools, implements, vessels and surfaces shall at all times be kept scrupulously clean and strict<br />

precautions shall be taken to prevent the plaster or other materials from being contaminated by pieces of<br />

partially set material which would tend to retard or accelerate the setting time .<br />

Coating work shall not be started until all :<br />

a) required openings, chases or other apertures have been cut<br />

b) pipes, fixtures, fixing pads and plugs have been fixed<br />

c) making good has been completed .<br />

The Contractor shall protect all existing work and approaches, with boards, dust sheets etc. All droppings<br />

onto finished work shall be cleaned off immediately .<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that all plant and tools are kept clean and free from previous mixes .<br />

The Contractor shall make good defective or damaged coatings before starting decoration works .<br />

5 Preparation For Plaster etc.<br />

All surfaces to be plastered shall be clean and free from dust, loose mortar and all traces of salts .<br />

Projections and concrete fins shall be hacked off. Traces of mould oil , paint , grease , dust and other<br />

incompatible materials shall be removed by scrubbing with water containing detergent .<br />

Where cement plaster is to be applied the surfaces shall first be wetted and dashed with a mixture of<br />

Portland cement and sand (1:2) mix to form a key . This should be kept wet with a fine water spray until<br />

set, and allowed to harden before applying undercoat for a minimum of 3 days.<br />

All surfaces shall be thoroughly sprayed with water and all free water allowed to disappear before plaster<br />

is applied.<br />

40


Bonding agents where required shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and<br />

must be approved by the Engineer.<br />

Before plastering is commenced all junctions between differing materials shall be reinforced in accordance<br />

with clause 9.21.<br />

6 Curing Of Plaster etc.<br />

Each coat of plaster should be kept damp for the first three days. Care must be taken to prevent too rapid<br />

drying out during hot weather and in drying winds.<br />

The Contractor shall therefore provide a protective covering of plastic or similar impervious sheeting which<br />

must be hung so that it is clear of the finished surface.<br />

Any cracking, discoloration or other defects caused by inadequate protection shall be remedied at the<br />

Contractor's expense.<br />

7 Uses Of Plaster etc.<br />

The type, mix and thickness of plaster for each location shall be as stated in the Particular Specification or<br />

shown on the Drawings, and shall generally be selected from the Schedule of Plasters given in Table P1 .<br />

DESCRIPTION<br />

Table P1 : Schedule Of Plasters<br />

Render and<br />

Spray Cement<br />

and Sand<br />

Plain Face Cement and Sand<br />

Gauged Plastering Lime and<br />

Sand with Cement<br />

Total Walls 13 15 13<br />

Thickness Ceilings 10 10 10<br />

Undercoats Mix Surface 1:4 Floated 1:4 Scratched 1:10:2.5 Scratched<br />

Thickness Walls 10 as required as required<br />

(mm) Ceilings 7 as required as required<br />

Finishing Mix Surface 1:1 Sprayed 1:4 trowelled or floated 1:10:2.5 trowelled or floated<br />

Thickness Walls 3 as required as required<br />

(mm) Ceilings 3 as required as required<br />

Remarks External use External or internal use may be<br />

applied in one coat to ceiling<br />

only if finished thickness is<br />

12mm and the required surface<br />

finish is obtained<br />

Internal use may be applied in<br />

one coat if finished thickness is<br />

12mm and the required surface<br />

finish is obtained.<br />

8 Application Of Plaster etc.<br />

After preparation of the surfaces the undercoat shall be applied to the required thickness between screeds<br />

laid, ruled and plumbed as necessary When nearly set the surface of the undercoat shall be scratched . The<br />

undercoat shall be allowed to set hard and shall be cured . Where plastering is applied in one coat or where<br />

roughcast is to be applied the scratching should be omitted .<br />

The finishing coat shall be applied to the required thickness by means of a laying - on trowel and finished<br />

to give the required surface .<br />

The surfaces shall be finished to a true plane to correct line and level , with all angles and corners to a right<br />

angle unless otherwise specified , and with walls and reveals plumb and square . The surfaces shall be<br />

finished to within 3 mm of a straight edge 1.80m long placed on face of plaster.<br />

41


Undercoat shall be worked well into the interstices of metal work to obtain maximum key.<br />

Each coat shall be applied firmly to achieve good adhesion , and ruled to an even surface .<br />

Each coat shall be applied to each wall and ceiling surface in one continuous operation.<br />

Each coat shall be applied at full thickness down to floor level or skirting lath.<br />

All undercoats shall be cross-scratched to provide key for next coat.<br />

Cement based undercoats shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly to ensure that drying shrinkage is<br />

substantially complete before applying subsequent coat.<br />

50 mm each side of angle bead to be finished with neat Keene’s cement before plaster finishing coat is<br />

applied . Where angle beads are not specified, angles shall be formed with pencil round arris .<br />

Smooth Finish<br />

Finished with a steel laying trowel to an even surface .<br />

Wood Float Or Plain Finish<br />

Finished with a dry wooden float as soon as wet sheen has disappeared from surface to give overall even<br />

texture .<br />

Rough Textured Finish<br />

Finished with a cork or carpet float to provide a rough but even open-textured surface .<br />

Scraped finish<br />

Finished with laying trowel to uniform thickness and after coat has set but before it is too hard , aggregate<br />

exposed by scraping surface of skin to approved texture .<br />

Rough Cast Finish<br />

Thrown on while wet with trowel or scooped to an even texture and left as cast .<br />

Dry Dash Finish<br />

Top coat of rendering finished to uniform thickness; while coating is plastic , aggregate thrown on to cover<br />

surface and particles pressed lightly into mortar to ensure adhesion .<br />

Sprayed Finish<br />

The sprayed finish shall be applied with an approved machine to give a finish of even texture and thickness.<br />

The sprayed finish shall be applied in three separate coats allowing time for drying between coats.<br />

Application in one continuous operation to build up a thick layer will not be permitted . The total finished<br />

thickness of the four sprayed coats shall be not less than 3 mm. The sprayed finish shall not be applied<br />

until all repairs and making good to the undercoat are completed. Rainwater pipes, fittings and the like shall<br />

first be fitted, then removed during the spraying process and refitted and jointed afterwards. Any plaster<br />

which adheres to other pipes, doors, windows and the like shall be carefully removed before it has set.<br />

Curing shall take place after the application of the fourth coat.<br />

42


9 Steel Mesh Lathing, Stops And Beads<br />

Steel mesh lathing shall be galvanized type weighing 1.6kg/m.<br />

Steel rods for distancing shall be hot rolled mild steel round bars to BS 4449, diameter to approval ,<br />

galvanized to BS 729 or bitumen coated .<br />

Steel clout nails shall be to BS 1202:Part 1, Table 3, galvanized to BS 729.<br />

Galvanized steel angle bead with 50 mm galvanized expanded metal mesh on both sides of bead .<br />

Mesh lathing shall be fixed with the long way of the mesh at right angles to supports.<br />

In horizontal work it shall be fixed with all mesh strands sloping in the same direction.<br />

In vertical work it shall be fixed with all mesh strands sloping inwards and downwards from face of<br />

coating.<br />

Lathing shall be fixed from the center outwards so that it is taut.<br />

Lathing shall not be lapped within 100mm of angles or curves .<br />

Junctions of lathing shall be reinforced at corners with 75 x 75 mm angled plain mesh , fixed to rails with<br />

tying wire at not more than 100mm centers .<br />

Ends of wire shall be bent away from face of coating .<br />

Beads and stops shall be fixed plumb , square and true to line and level .<br />

Metal angle beads shall be fixed to solid backgrounds with plaster dabs , and shall be fixed to timber<br />

supports with 28mm clout nails . Both types of fixing shall be on each side of angle at not more than<br />

600mm centers .<br />

At junctions between dissimilar solid backgrounds in the same plane and with the same coating , steel<br />

lathing shall be fixed with 38 mm clout nails or with staples . They shall be driven into drilled and plugged<br />

holes or into fixing bricks or plugs built in or cast in :<br />

(a) At single junctions , lathing to be not less than 450mm wide , fixed each edge at 100 mm centers .<br />

(b) At columns, lathing to extend not less than 150mm beyond each junction, fixed each edge and<br />

centrally at 100 mm centers .<br />

Side edges of lathing shall be lapped not less than 25mm , and secure with tying wire at not more than<br />

100mm centers .<br />

Ends of lathing shall be lapped 40mm at supports and 50mm between supports, and secured with tying wire<br />

at not more than 100m centers.<br />

Lathing fixed to metal supports shall be fixed with hair-pin shaped tying wire ties at not more than 100mm<br />

centers , passed over the support with both ends through mesh , twisted tight , ends cut off and bent flat .<br />

Concrete , blockwork or masonry backgrounds shall be drilled and plugged at not more than 100x400mm<br />

centers and the lathing shall be fixed with 38mm clout nails or wire staples driven at an angle to tauten the<br />

mesh .<br />

43


SECTION: 8<br />

WALL AND FLOOR TILING WORKS<br />

1 General<br />

The British Standards (BS) govern the work covered in this section .<br />

2 Materials<br />

Portland cement, fine aggregate and water shall be as previously specified in Concrete Work section.<br />

The marble chipping shall be of an approved quality in irregular pieces varying from 2 mm to 10 mm in<br />

size depending on the effect required. The pieces should preferably be roughly cubical in shape where flaky<br />

shaped pieces shall not be used.<br />

The granite chipping shall be of an approved quality graded from 12 mm down with not more than 5<br />

percent fine material passing a No.100 sieve.<br />

Marble and granite aggregates shall comply generally with the Table of Gradings. In connection with<br />

marble aggregates the percentages are approximate only. The actual grading should be selected to produce<br />

the surface effects required.<br />

BS 410<br />

Sieve No.<br />

Table Of Gradings<br />

Approximate Size Percentage of Aggregate Passing Through Sieve<br />

mm GRANITE MARBLE<br />

- 13 100 -<br />

- 10 95-100 95-100<br />

- 5 30-60 25-60<br />

7 2.4 20-50 5-30<br />

14 1.2 15-40 0-10<br />

25 0.6 10-30 -<br />

59 0.3 5-15 -<br />

100 0.15 0-5 -<br />

NOTE: the above figures represent the limits of percentages (by weight) passing sieves of the sizes<br />

mentioned .<br />

3 Cement And Sand Tiles<br />

Cement and sand tiles shall be formed with a (1:2) mix of white or coloured cement, or in white cement<br />

with a colour pigment added , and sand applied as a facing not less than 7.5mm thick to a Portland cement<br />

and sand (1:5) mix backing .<br />

The tiles shall be cast in heavy moulds under pressure to the proportions and sizes shown in the following<br />

table .<br />

44


Cement And Sand Tile Dimensions<br />

Size<br />

Size tolerances<br />

Minimum total thickness<br />

mm<br />

mm<br />

mm<br />

200x200 0.5 20<br />

250x250 0.5 25<br />

300x300 1.0 25<br />

400x400 1.0 30<br />

Coloured cement and sand skirting to match tiles , 100mm or 200mm with chamfered top edges shall be<br />

produced in the same way as the tiles using the same mixes .<br />

All cement and sand tiles shall be cured by totally immersing them, after the initial set has taken place , in a<br />

tank of clean water for at least 24 hours.<br />

Cement and sand tiles shall be laid and bedded direct onto a concrete sub-floor on a cement and sand (1:4)<br />

mix screed. This screed shall be 25mm thick in the case of 25mm tiles and 30mm thick in the case of<br />

20mm tiles. The total thickness of cement and sand screed and tiles shall not exceed 50mm. All tiles shall<br />

be laid with square joints.<br />

All tiling shall be grouted up on completion, care being taken to fill all joints completely. The grout shall<br />

consist of neat cement of a colour to match the tiling. Any surplus grout shall be cleaned off the face of the<br />

tiling and surrounding surfaces immediately and all tiling shall be carefully cleaned off.<br />

4 Terrazzo Tiles<br />

Terrazzo tiles shall be formed with a (1:2 1/2) mix of white or coloured cement or white cement with a<br />

colour pigment added and granular marble chippings applied as a facing not less than 5 mm thick to a<br />

Portland cement and sand (1:5)) mix backing.<br />

The tiles shall be cast in heavy metal moulds under pressure to the proportions and sizes shown in the<br />

following table.<br />

Terrazzo Tile Dimensions<br />

Size<br />

Size tolerances<br />

Minimum total<br />

mm<br />

mm<br />

thickness mm<br />

200x200 0.5 20<br />

250x250 0.5 25<br />

300x300 1.0 25<br />

400x400 1.0 30<br />

Tiles shall be cured as for cement and sand tiles and then ground, filled and polished before distribution to<br />

site.<br />

Grinding shall be done wet by means of a No. 80 carborundum stone. Filling shall be carried out with a<br />

neat cement grout of the same colour as the facing mix and this shall be worked into the surface with a<br />

wooden shaper to fill all voids and air holes .<br />

Surplus grout shall be removed with a dry cloth . After a minimum period of 24 hours polishing shall be<br />

carried out wet by means of a No. 140 carborundum stone .<br />

Terrazzo skirting 100mm or 200mm high with chamfered top edges shall be produced in the same way as<br />

for tiles using the same mixes .<br />

45


Terrazzo tiles shall be laid and bedded direct onto a sand layer with a cement and sand (1:4) mix mortar.<br />

This mortar shall be 25mm thick in the case of 25mm tiles and 30mm thick in the case of 20mm tiles. The<br />

total thickness of the cement and sand screed and tiles shall not exceed 50 mm .<br />

All tiling shall be grouted up on completion ; care being taken to fill all joints completely . The grout shall<br />

consist of neat cement of a colour to match the tiling . Any surplus grout shall be cleaned off the face of<br />

the tiling and surrounding surfaces immediately and all tiling shall be carefully cleaned off .<br />

All terrazzo surfaces shall be polished on completion. Large areas such as floors shall be wet polished by<br />

means of approved machines using No. 140 carborundum wheel. Any surface too small for convenient<br />

machine polishing may be polished by hand using a No.140 carborundum stone and water Care must be<br />

taken during any polishing operation not to damage any of angles or arrises .<br />

Terrazzo covering to items such as sills , treads and risers to steps , skirtings etc. , shall generally be applied<br />

in accordance with theforegoing specification except that the thickness of the facing shall be at least 10<br />

mm ( marble can be used if approved by the Engineer ) .<br />

5 Marble Paving<br />

Marble pavings shall generally be 30 mm thick and the size , type and pattern shall be as stated in the<br />

Particular Specification and/or shown on the Drawings . The marble slabs shall be fixed solid on a bed of<br />

cement and sand (1:4) mix 30 mm thick with tight joints grouted in lime putty . A protective slurry of lime<br />

putty at least 3 mm thick shall be applied to the marble pavings and subsequently cleaned off .<br />

Treads shall be 30mm thick fixed solid on a bed of cement and sand (1:4) mix 30mm thick. Risers to stairs<br />

shall be 20mm thick fixed solid on a backing of cement and sand (1:4) mix 30 mm thick. Window sills<br />

shall be 40mm thick bedded hollow on plaster slabs. Skirtings shall be 10mm thick , in lengths of about 1.5<br />

meters , fixed solid on a backing of cement and to coincide with joints in adjacent pavings . Rounded<br />

arrises, nosing and moldings shall be adequately protected by means of timber casings. Treads, risers,<br />

skirtings and window sills shall be grouted and protected in a manner similar to pavings.<br />

The exposed faces and edges of all marble shall be polished smooth and be free from scratches or other<br />

defects. Concealed faces of marble shall be treated with shellac or bituminous paint.<br />

6 Marble Lining<br />

Marble lining to walls, columns and the like shall generally be 20 mm thick and the size, type and pattern<br />

shall be as stated in the Particular <strong>Specifications</strong> and/or as shown on the drawings .<br />

The marble slabs shall be cut square and true and shall be uniform in shape and thickness. Patterns and<br />

mouldings shall be accurately formed in accordance with the Drawings.<br />

Exposed edges and mouldings shall be protected by means of timber casing or lime putty coating. The<br />

exposed edges and faces of all marble shall be polished smooth and shall be free from scratches or other<br />

defects.<br />

7 Ceramic , Glazed And Quarry Tiling<br />

Clay floor quarries and fittings shall be in accordance with BS 1286 type A and the thickness and size shall<br />

be as stated in the Particular Specification or on the Drawings .<br />

Ceramic floor tiles and fittings shall be in accordance with BS 1286 type B , vitrified or fully vitrified and<br />

the thickness and size shall be as stated in the Particular Specification or on the Drawings .<br />

46


Glazed ceramic floor tiling shall be of the type , thickness and size as stated in the Particular Specification<br />

or on the Drawings .<br />

The tiles shall be true to shape, flat and free from flaws, cracks and crazing and keyed on the reverse side<br />

and shall be of amanufacture approved by the Engineer .<br />

Bedding mortar shall be cement and sand all in accordance with the materials stated in Concrete Work and<br />

Blockwork sections.<br />

Any admixtures to the mortar must be approved before use.<br />

Grout pointing shall be white or coloured cement.<br />

Cement and sand mortar bed of not more than 20 mm or thickness of the tile shall be laid .<br />

Tiles shall be firmly tamped into mortar to form a level surface.<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that when fixing tiles with thin bed adhesive, the base to receive tiles is clean ,<br />

level and dry , with no loose and friable areas and surface dusting .<br />

Cement-based adhesive shall be prepared and used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations<br />

to form a bed not more than 3 mm thick.<br />

Tiles shall be laid dry and tamped well down into the adhesive to ensure a proper bond with base and a<br />

level surface.<br />

When bedding tiles on thick bed, semi-dry cement and sand (1:4) mortar bed shall be spread not less than<br />

25 mm thick.<br />

Before the compacted bed has set a cement and sand slurry (1:1) about 3mm thick shall be spread over the<br />

surface .<br />

The tiles shall be laid dry and tamped into the slurry to form a level surface .<br />

Joints shall be even and not more than 3mm wide, in both directions .<br />

Joints shall be continuous both horizontally and vertically .<br />

The tiles shall be grouted up with white or coloured cement mortar (1:1) worked well into joints when bed<br />

is sufficiently firm to prevent disturbances of the tiles; surplus grout shall be cleaned off from faces of tiles<br />

.<br />

Movement joints shall be provided not less than 6 mm wide where shown on the Drawings or as directed<br />

by the Engineer .<br />

Movement joints shall be carried through the depth of tile and bedding and partially filled with filling strip<br />

and finished flush with sealant to manufacturer's recommendations .<br />

Where tiling abuts against wood or metal frames or other tiling at angles and around pipes etc. , it shall be<br />

carefully cut and fitted to form a close neat joint . Open irregular joints filled with cement and sand or<br />

plaster will not be permitted .<br />

Tiles shall be cleaned off and polished at completion .<br />

Water shall not be allowed on new tiling until bedding and grouting have completely set .<br />

47


No traffic shall be allowed on the floor until 4 days after<br />

further 10 days .<br />

completion and then only light traffic for a<br />

8 Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiling<br />

Glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be in accordance with BS 1281 with or without cushioned edges and spacer<br />

lugs and shall be white or coloured as stated in the Particular Specification .<br />

Glazed ceramic tile fittings shall be rounded edge or angle bead type to match plain tiles.<br />

The tiles shall be true to shape, flat and free form flaws , cracks and crazing and keyed on the reverse side<br />

and shall be of a manufacture approved by the Engineer .<br />

Bedding mortar shall be cement and sand (1:3) all in accordance with the materials stated in Concrete Work<br />

and Blockwork sections<br />

Any admixtures to the mortar must be approved before use .<br />

Mastic adhesives shall be of an approved manufacture and shall comply with the performance requirements<br />

of CP 212: Part 1, if approved by the Engineer .<br />

Grout pointing shall be neat white or coloured cement .<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that the cement render backing is at least 14 days old , firmly bonded to its<br />

background , free from dust, with surfaces plumb and true to 3mm in any 1800 mm .<br />

Fixing Tiles With Cement And Sand Mortar<br />

The tiles shall be immersed in water for 6 hours or until saturated then stacked tightly together to drain with<br />

end tiles turned glaze outwards . Tiles shall be fixed as soon as surface water has drained .<br />

The render coat shall be wetted sufficiently to prevent it absorbing water from the bedding coat .<br />

Mortar bedding shall be applied to render background to an even thickness of approximately 10mm .<br />

Each tile shall be buttered evenly with mortar and tapped firmly into position so that the bed is solid<br />

throughout .<br />

Thickness of finished bed shall be not less than 6mm nor more than 12 mm .<br />

Any necessary adjustment to tiles shall be made within ten minutes of fixing and tiles cleaned off after not<br />

less than two hours .<br />

Fixing Tiles With Adhesive<br />

The tiles shall be fixed in accordance with the recommendations of the adhesive manufacturer .<br />

Adhesive shall be applied not more than 1sq.m at a time to avoid premature drying out .<br />

Adhesive shall be applied as a continuous screed to a thickness of approximately 3mm on the surface to be<br />

tiled .<br />

Dry tiles shall be pressed on to the adhesive and tapped firmly into position to ensure solid bedding without<br />

voids .<br />

Any necessary adjustment to tiles shall be made immediately after bedding .<br />

48


Tiles shall be cleaned off as soon as bedding is complete .<br />

Joints shall be even and not more than 2mm wide using spacer lug tiles or spacer pegs .<br />

Joints shall be continuous both horizontally and vertically .<br />

Tiles shall be fixed to a finished surface that is plumb and true to 2mm in any 2m .<br />

Joints shall be grouted up not less than 24 hours after fixing tiles to porous surfaces and not less than 3 days<br />

after fixing to impervious surfaces .<br />

Tiles shall be grouted by pressing mix firmly into joints , working in areas of not more than 1sq.m .<br />

Surplus grout shall be cleaned off as the work proceeds .<br />

Where tiling abuts against wood or metal frames or other tiling at angles and around pipes etc. , it shall be<br />

carefully cut and fitted to form a close neat joint . Open irregular joints filled with cement and sand or<br />

plaster will not be permitted .<br />

Tiles shall be cleaned off and polished on completion .<br />

External tiling shall be protected from inclement weather until grouting is completely set .<br />

No water is to be allowed on new tiling until bedding and grouting have completely set .<br />

9 Protection<br />

All floor , wall and ceiling finishes shall be protected from damage during subsequent work , and<br />

shall be thoroughly cleaned before handing over the works<br />

49


SECTION: 9<br />

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY<br />

1 Timber<br />

All softwood for carpentry and joinery work shall be well seasoned sound , bright , free form shakes ,<br />

large loose or dead knots , waney edges , warp , incipient decay , stained sapwood or other defects and<br />

shall be to the approval of the Engineer .<br />

Timber for carpentry work shall be carefully sawn square and shall hold the full dimensions shown on<br />

the Drawings .<br />

The hardwood for joinery work shall be to the approval of the Engineer , well seasoned , close grained<br />

and free form all defects. Hardwood for polishing or clear treatment shall be selected and kept clean .<br />

Any preservative treatment shall be approved by the Engineer .<br />

The Contractor shall allow for all necessary cutting of timber to size and shape, for preparation of<br />

surfaces, for all fixings, for properly jointing and putting together including farming , gluing , doweling<br />

screwing and mortising , for all cutting and waste , notching , sinking , scribing , mitres , ends , short<br />

lengths and any other sundry items of like nature and for priming all concealed surfaces of joinery.<br />

Aluminium primer shall be applied to concealed surfaces of all joinery timber .<br />

All sizes and dimensions shown on the Drawings are finished sizes unless otherwise stated .<br />

Timber for joinery work shall be finished work to the exact sizes shown on the Drawings with pencil<br />

rounded exposed arrises and no joinery shall be built in until inspected and approved by the Engineer .<br />

The whole of hardwood joinery shall be rubbed down to a smooth surface and left clean and ready to<br />

receive any oiled or other finish<br />

Where screw fixings would show on the surface of hardwood, the heads shall be countersunk 6mm<br />

below timber surface and grain matched fillets not less than 6mm thick and traped and cut from<br />

matching timber shall be glued in and finished off flush with the face . This will apply equally to<br />

hardwood which is to be painted .<br />

2 Moisture Content Of Timber<br />

The softwood generally shall have a maximum moisture content of 12% .<br />

The hardwood shall have a maximum moisture content of 10% and shall have been kiln dried .<br />

The whole of the timber for joinery work shall be properly stacked and protected from rain and ground<br />

moisture .<br />

3 Plywood<br />

The minimum thickness shall be 5mm .<br />

Plywood face veneers shall be approved by the Engineer .<br />

Plywood adhesives shall be approved by the Engineer .<br />

50


The Contractor shall not be permitted to make up the required thickness by gluing together sheets of thinner<br />

plywood.<br />

4 Timber Face Veneers<br />

All timber face veneers that are exposed shall be selected to the approval of the Engineer and shall be<br />

hard , durable and capable of being finished easily to a smooth surface .<br />

They shall be free from knots , worm and beetle holes , splits , glue stains , filling or inlaying of any<br />

kind , or defects .<br />

Timber for face veneers shall be as described in the Particular Specification or as shown on the<br />

Drawings .<br />

5 Fixing And Jointing<br />

Softwood in carpentry work shall be put together with steel nails except where described as framed<br />

when it shall be properly jointed and held together with glue and steel screws . Fixings shall be stout<br />

steel nails and screws .<br />

Joinery work shall be carefully put together and properly jointed in accordance with best practice , all<br />

joints shall be glued and screwed or doweled . Any screws appearing on facework shall have the heads<br />

let in and pellated unless otherwise described. Softwood fixings shall be stout steel screws .<br />

Where joinery is required to be put together and fixed with brass cups and screws , the cups for fixing<br />

hardwood joinery shall be cast brass cups with milled edges and shall be neatly let in to finish flush with<br />

the face of the work .<br />

Nail lengths shall not be more than total thickness of sections to be joined less 5mm , but otherwise not<br />

less than twice the thickness of the section through which nails are driven .<br />

Screw lengths shall be not more than total thickness of sections to be joined less 5mm , but otherwise<br />

not less than 1 times the thickness of the section through which screws are driven .<br />

Proprietary plugs shall be approved by the Engineer .<br />

Steel nails shall comply with BS 1202 : Part 1 .<br />

Wood screws shall be brass complying with Bs 1210 with slotted countersunk heads .<br />

Screw cups shall be brass complying with BS 1494 : Part 2 .<br />

Synthetic resin gap-filling adhesives shall comply with BS 1204 : Part 1 , type WBP .<br />

Synthetic resin close-contact adhesives shall comply with BS 1204: Part 2 , type WBP .<br />

6 Spacings And Additional Supports<br />

Where no dimensions are specified or shown on Drawings , space battens , fillets , grounds studs etc. ,<br />

shall be used in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacture of the sheets and/or sections<br />

being fixed .<br />

51


Where not shown on Drawings , additional supports shall be positioned and fixed for appliances ,<br />

fixtures , edges of sheets etc. , in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations .<br />

7 Doors<br />

Doors shall be as specified below or in the Particular Conditions obtained from one of the approved<br />

manufacturers listed and shall be capable of withstanding the particular weather conditions of the<br />

Middle East .<br />

Door leaves with a polished finish are to be veneered as described in the Particular Conditions with the<br />

approved hardwood veneered plywood factory finished and supplied with protective wrappings , and<br />

with all necessary preparation for ironmongery carried out .<br />

All edges are to be lipped with hardwood and all beads and lippings are to match face veneers .<br />

All doors whether light cored , solid cored and/or fire resisting shall conform to BS 459 and 476 and<br />

4787 as appropriate with adequate blocking out for ironmongery etc.<br />

Door frames shall be as shown on the Drawings all in wrought hardwood treated to match doors in<br />

accordance with door manufacturer's recommendations and should be manufactured and finished by the<br />

door manufacturer where possible .<br />

Hardwood polished thresholds are to be provided to individual flat entrance doors . All other doors<br />

within flats should allow sufficient clearance for fitted carpets . The Contractor should ascertain<br />

requirements for clearance in all other positions from the Engineer .<br />

8 Windows<br />

Windows and fanlight sashes shall be framed to the size shown on the Drawings . Sashes hung folding<br />

shall have meeting beads screwed on . Glazing bars if required shall be of twice rebated section .<br />

Aluminium windows (Best quality) will be used. Colour and type of section must be approved by the<br />

Engineer.<br />

9 Flyscreens<br />

Flyscreens to doors shall be framed and braced with rails styles and braces and filled in with aluminium<br />

mesh , 18x16 meshes per inch .<br />

10 Frames<br />

Frames to doors, windows and flyscreens shall be provided and built in to the sizes shown on the<br />

Drawings or as directed by the Engineer .<br />

Frames shall be securely tied to walls by means of steel or similar metal cramps , galvanised or dipped<br />

in bitumen and provided as follows :<br />

(a) Door frames : three cramps to each side .<br />

(b) Window frames : two or more cramps to each side according to size .<br />

(c) Any other way approved by the Engineer (e .g. foam bond)<br />

Doors , windows, etc. shall be carefully and accurately fitted to the frames to give a uniform clearance<br />

of not more than 3mm all round.<br />

52


11 Architraves , Door Stops etc.<br />

Architraves , door stops etc. shall be as shown on the Drawings and all properly mitred at intersections<br />

as approved by the Engineer .<br />

Glazing beads where required shall be wrought splayed and rounded and shall be neatly mitred and<br />

fixed with small brads or lost-head nails.<br />

12 Fittings<br />

In connection with fittings such as wardrobes , cupboards , counters etc., the doors, frames, drawers,<br />

rails and framing etc. shall be properly and accurately framed together .<br />

Before starting repetitive fabrication of any component , prototypes shall be prepared and approved .<br />

Unless components are specified to be built in , these shall not be made until all site dimensions have<br />

been checked .<br />

Matching clearance holes shall be provided for all sizes of screw and matching pilot holes for screws of<br />

6 gauge or more for screwing softwood .<br />

Clearance and pilot holes to match screw sizes shall be provided for screwing hardwood .<br />

Pilot holes shall be provided slightly less than half the diameter of the screw for screwing particle board<br />

.<br />

13 Finish<br />

All nail heads which will be visible in completed work shall be punched below timber surface .<br />

All joinery which is to be polished, varnished or painted shall be finished smooth and clean by rubbing<br />

down with fine sandpaper .<br />

14 Protection<br />

All joinery shall be protected from damage during the course of the Works and on completion shall be<br />

to the Engineer's entire satisfaction . Before handing over the Contractor shall ensure that all doors ,<br />

drawers , etc. , work easily and shall make all necessary adjustments including those needed during the<br />

maintenance period.<br />

53


SECTION: 10<br />

IRONMONGERY<br />

1 Description<br />

The Contractor shall provide and fix the ironmongery required by the Particular <strong>Specifications</strong> or shown<br />

on the Drawings complete, including all necessary screws , bolts , plugs and other fixings . The use of<br />

nails for fixing ironmongery shall not be permitted . The Contractor shall hand over all in a finished state<br />

and to the satisfaction of the Engineer .<br />

All ironmongery shall be of first quality and shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer . Butt<br />

hinges are to be aluminium alloy with silver anodised finish with double stainless steel washers , or as<br />

approved by the Engineer .<br />

The Contractor shall be required to submit for approval samples of all items of ironmongery he proposes<br />

to use .<br />

All doors shall be provided with an approved door stop plugged and screwed to the floor and all opening<br />

areas of aluminium work shall be provided with appropriate friction stays . The size , materials , finishes<br />

, type and quality of ironmongery shall be as described in the Particular Specification or as shown on the<br />

Drawings .<br />

2 Finish<br />

The finish of the various items of ironmongery shall be as described in the Particular Specification or as<br />

shown on the Drawings or as required and directed by the Engineer .<br />

3 Fitting And Testing<br />

All screws used for fixing ironmongery shall be of a suitable type , material , finish , size and shape to<br />

the satisfaction of the Engineer .<br />

The hinges on which doors , windows , flyscreen doors etc. , are hung shall be carefully housed or let<br />

into the door , window, flyscreen door etc. , and to the frames .<br />

All fittings shall be removed before commencing any painting operations and shall be refixed in place<br />

after all painting works are completed and approved by the Engineer .<br />

All ironmongery shall be carefully wrapped and protected until completion of the work and any items or<br />

parts which are damaged or defaced or found to be defective shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense<br />

before handing over.<br />

On completion of all locks , catches and similar items of ironmongery they shall be clearly labelled , with<br />

metal tags approximately 50x20mm and securely fixed to the keys and handed to the Engineer .<br />

Door closers shall be fitted a maximum of two weeks before handover .<br />

All floor and door springs are to be fully charged with oil and their operation checked to the satisfaction<br />

of the Engineer.<br />

4 Standard Ironmongery For Internal Doors<br />

54


Ironmongery is to be hard satin anodised aluminium alloy of best quality with matching screws fully<br />

matching and integrated . Where a supplier cannot offer the particular required ironmongery the<br />

Contractor shall produce samples of other suppliers' items most nearly matching the general ironmongery<br />

and /or produce alternative ironmongery by the main supplier most closely conforming with the<br />

Specification for the approval of the Engineer.<br />

All locks are to be provided with 2 keys on a key ring neatly labelled to indicate clearly the<br />

corresponding lock .<br />

Any requirements for ' Master key ' locking systems will be stated in the Particular Conditions and /or on<br />

the Drawings.<br />

All knob sets shall include the appropriate mortice latch or lock with a 70 mm backset and with standard<br />

faceplates and roses unless otherwise noted.<br />

55


SECTION: 11<br />

METAL WORKS<br />

1 Cleanliness<br />

All materials shall be free form scale , damage or defects . All welding , brazing or hot forging shall be<br />

carried out by approved processes .<br />

All metalwork shall be approved by the Engineer before starting painting works .<br />

2 Aluminium Windows And Doors<br />

Extruded aluminium sections should be used as approved by the Engineer .<br />

All visible surfaces of the sections shall be brilliantly polished prior to anodising . The colour of anodising<br />

shall be as described in the Drawings and /or Particular Specification . Samples of colour shall be<br />

submitted for the Engineer's approval before work commences .<br />

The sections shall be anodised to a minimum thickness of 25 microns . The supplier must submit<br />

necessary evidence to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the thickness of anodisation is not less than 25<br />

microns . In case of doubt the Engineer reserves the right to send sample pieces to independent testing<br />

laboratories , at the supplier's expense . If the testing laboratory report states that the thickness or quality of<br />

the anodisation is deficient , the Employer may ask the supplier to treat the order as cancelled and the<br />

supplier in such a case shall indemnify the Employer of any / all losses incurred by the supplier .<br />

All farmes shall be made to fit the actual openings with a 5mm clearance all round . Discrepancies in<br />

overall width or height exceeding 5mm will not be allowed and the frames will be rejected in such cases .<br />

All small discrepancies shall have the gaps suitably backed and then filled with gun- applied mastic /<br />

sealant as approved by the Engineer .<br />

At all opening windows and doors and where there are louvred screens and doors a flyscreen shall be<br />

provided to the approval of the Engineer , constructed following the principles and specifications as<br />

described elsewhere in this Specification .<br />

Insect screens shall be in aluminium mesh, 18x16 meshes per inch. The gap between the insect screen and<br />

the shutter shall be covered with an adaptor PVC section .<br />

For reference to window types see general arrangement drawings and elevations .<br />

Tolerances are to be approved by the Engineer before manufacture.<br />

All ironmongery which is to have the same finish as the frames it is to be installed on shall be approved by<br />

the Engineer .<br />

The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for aluminium windows and doors which shall be submitted in<br />

quadruplicate to the Engineer for approval .<br />

Approval by the Engineer of the shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under<br />

the Contract .<br />

All assembly screws shall be in 18-8 stainless steel .<br />

56


Glazing sections shall be in special heat-resisting PVC and of channel type . Separate glazing sections on<br />

each side of the glass will not be permitted .<br />

Sliding Windows And Doors<br />

Weatherstripping - high density acrilan or wool weather - pile shall be used . There shall be double brushes<br />

at every contact between shutter and frame sections for complete insulation .These shall be present<br />

consistently throughout the unit between the inside and the outside and no portions without it are permitted<br />

.<br />

The rollers for sliding shutters for windows and doors shall be of an adjustable type . The adjusting screws<br />

shall be accessible in the assembled state of the shutters and a vertical adjustment of 7mm shall be possible<br />

.<br />

All sections for sliding windows and doors shall be of tubular shape and the cross sectional dimensions of<br />

same shall be not less than 60x 40 mm .<br />

The outer frame must be suitable for accommodating sliding flyscreens as required or as directed by the<br />

Engineer .<br />

The handle-latch set shall have all visible surfaces of anodised aluminium or similar non-rusting material<br />

to approval . The handle shall have a proper grip . A small projecting flange or a recess in the shutter<br />

sections shall not be accepted to serve as a handle . The latching mechanism shall not be surface mounted<br />

but shall be concealed within the sections .<br />

Side Hung Windows , Doors And Ventilators<br />

All windows and doors shall be weatherstripped with heat resistant PVC sections . The weather fighting<br />

action shall be achieved by a positive compressive action against the PVC section and shall not depend on<br />

an external contact with the PVC section . At every contact between two profiles two weatherstipping<br />

sections shall be provided for complete weather protection .<br />

The bottom sections of hinged doors shall be capable of being adjusted vertically if necessary. The gap<br />

between the bottom section and the floor shall be covered with a pair of special flay-type PVC sections .<br />

The shutter sections for windows and doors shall be of tubular type and shall be of overall size 57x45mm<br />

for windows and overall size 81x45mm for doors ( including flanges ) .<br />

The shutters of the windows and doors shall be assembled with concealed corners of high rigidity . Hinges<br />

shall be concealed within the sections .<br />

Hinges shall be in anodised aluminium with stainless steel pins and nylon washers . Handles shall be in<br />

anodised aluminium and mounted with self - lubricating nylon washers .<br />

A mortice cylinder rim automatic deadlock of high quality with double pin tumbler shall be used .<br />

Windows shall have anodised aluminium handles and a latching mechanism securing the shutter to the<br />

frame both at the top and bottom .<br />

The glazing vinyl shall be in heat resisting PVC and of channel type to the approval of the Engineer.<br />

3 Flyscreens<br />

Flyscreens shall be fitted to all opening leaves of windows, consisting of a separate metal sub-farme filled<br />

in with flywire as previously described . The flyscreens shall be adequately secured with suitable clips, set<br />

57


screws or turn buckles and shall be removable for maintenace purposes . Flyscreen doors shall consist of<br />

similar sections to the metal casement doors and shall be fitted with removable panels of flywire , in a<br />

manner similar to that described for window flyscreens . Flyscreen doors shall be mounted where indicated<br />

on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer .<br />

4 Sealing Joints<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that joints are dry and shall remove all loose material , dust and grease .<br />

Joints shall be prepared in accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations using recommended<br />

solvents and primers where necessary as approved by the Engineer .<br />

Backing strips shall be inserted in all joints to be pointed with sealant .<br />

When using backing strips , the Contractor shall not leave gaps and shall not reduce depth of joint for<br />

sealant to less than the minimum recommended by the manufacturer .<br />

Cavities shall be filled and jointed with sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations .<br />

Sealant shall be tooled to form a smooth flat bed .<br />

Excess sealant shall be removed from adjoinig surfaces using cleaning materials recommended by the<br />

sealant manufacturer , and shall be left clean .<br />

5 Expansion Joint Trims etc.<br />

The Contractor is to provide at all expansion joints in floors , roofs, ceilings , walls and columns extruded<br />

aluminium expansion joint cover systems as appropriate and as shown on the Drawings and fixed in<br />

accordance with their printed instructions including all necessary components and fixings .<br />

Floor joint covers shall be 2" deep . Butt joints within continuing runs shall be a maximum of 20 feet apart<br />

and will be sealed during installation .<br />

Wall and ceiling joint covers shall be standard grey .<br />

Transition pieced at changes of direction and at joints between horizontal and vertical joint covers shall be<br />

factory fabricated .<br />

58


SECTION : 12<br />

PAINTING AND DECORATING<br />

1 General<br />

Every possible precaution shall be taken to keep down dust before and during painting processes. No paint<br />

shall be applied to surfaces structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free<br />

from condensation , efflorescence etc. before the application of each coat .<br />

Primed or undercoated woodwork and metalwork should not be left in an exposed or unsuitable situation<br />

for an undue period before completing the painting process. No exterior or exposed painting shall be<br />

carried out under adverse weather conditions, such as rain, extreme humidity , dust storms etc.<br />

Metal fittings such as ironmongery etc. not required to be painted shall first be fitted and then removed<br />

before the preparatory processes are commenced. When all painting is completed the fittings shall be<br />

cleaned and refixed in position.<br />

The contractor will be required to repaint at his own expense any work on which the paint is found to be<br />

incorrectly applied. The contractor shall be responsible for protecting from damage the paint work and all<br />

other work during and after painting operations including the provision of all necessary dust sheets , covers<br />

etc.<br />

Brushes, pails, bottles etc., used in carrying out the work shall be clean and free from foreign matter . They<br />

shall be thoroughly cleaned before being used for different types or classes of material.<br />

The number of coats stated in this specification is the minimum, and the Contractor must apply sufficient<br />

coats to achieve a proper even finish to the approval of the Engineer .<br />

2 Materials<br />

The decorating materials shall be obtained from approved manufacturers and shall be supplied in the<br />

manufacturers' sealed and branded containers .<br />

All materials must be thoroughly stirred before use , unless not recommended by the manufacturer .<br />

Details of mixing and application shall be in accordance with the specifications of the manufacturers<br />

concerned and to the approval of the Engineer .<br />

The mixing of paints etc. of different brands before or during application will not be permitted . No dilution<br />

of painting materials shall be allowed except strictly as detailed by the manufacturers and as approved by<br />

the Engineer .<br />

Mordant solution shall be of approved manufacture .<br />

Rust inhibitors shall be of approved manufacture .<br />

Stopping for woodwork to receive clear finish shall be tinted to match surrounding woodwork , to the<br />

approval of the Engineer .<br />

Stopping for internal woodwork , plywood , hardboard , and fiberboard , shall be linseed oil putty , tinted to<br />

match the colour of the undercoat .<br />

Stopping for external woodwork shall be white lead paste and gold size well mixed .<br />

59


Thinners shall be approved turpentine or white spirit .<br />

Priming paints shall be :<br />

a) For woodwork : Leadless grey priming paint in accordance with the recommendations of the<br />

decorative coating manufacturer .<br />

(b) For steelwork : red oxide priming paint .<br />

(c) For galvanised, zinc or aluminum alloy surfaces : grey zinc chromate priming paint .<br />

(d) For plaster, concrete and brickwork , ceiling boards etc.: alkali resisting priming paint in accordance<br />

with the recommendations of the decorative coating manufacturer<br />

Knotting shall be in accordance with BS 1336 .<br />

Undercoating shall be :<br />

(a) Zinc oxide based undercoating paint;<br />

(b) White lead based undercoating paint . Colours shall approximate to the finishing paint .<br />

(c) Synthetic alkyd based undercoating in accordance with the recommendations of the decorative<br />

coating manufacturer .<br />

Finishing paints shall be :<br />

(a) Zinc oxide based oil paint :<br />

(b) White lead based oil gloss finishing paint .<br />

(c) Synthetic alkyd based finishing paint as approved by the Engineer .<br />

Petrifying liquid shall be used undiluted as supplied by the manufacturer A small quantity of water paint of<br />

the finishing colour may be mixed with the petrifying liquid .<br />

Water paint shall be an approved brand of washable oil-bound water paint . Thinning shall be done with<br />

petrifying liquid or fresh water only .<br />

Emulsion paint shall be of the Polyviny1 Acetate (PVA)type obtained from an approved manufacturer . The<br />

precise specification shall comply with the manufacturer's normal practice. In all cases thinning shall<br />

be done with thinners supplied by the manufacturer or fresh water only .<br />

Stain for woodwork shall be an approved brand of oil stain .<br />

Polyurethane lacquer for woodwork shall be of an approved manufacture .<br />

Preparation Process<br />

3 Internal Plaster , Fair Faced Concrete And Blockwork<br />

Surfaces shall be allowed to dry out completely and cracks shall be cut out and made good with suitable<br />

hard plaster or cement and sand mix as appropriate , such repaired portions shall be allowed to dry out . No<br />

painting shall be carried out on plastering less than five weeks old .<br />

Efflorescence shall be completely removed by rubbing down with dry coarse cloths followed by wiping<br />

down with damp cloths and allowed to dry. All surfaces shall be rubbed down with fine glass paper and<br />

brushed free of dust before applying any form of decoration .<br />

Surfaces which are to receive water paint shall be treated with one coat of petrifying liquid applied by brush<br />

and allowed to dry for at least 24 hours before the application of water paint . A period of 24 hours<br />

, or longer if necessary , shall be allowed between subsequent coats .<br />

60


Fair faced concrete and/or cement and sand plastered surfaces which are to receive oil paint shall be given<br />

one thin coat of oil putty and allowed to dry for at least two days .<br />

The surfaces shall then be rubbed down with fine glass paper and given a second thin coat of oil putty and<br />

when completely set The surfaces shall then be rubbed down with fine glass paper and given a second thin<br />

coat of oil putty and when completely set<br />

All surfaces which are to receive oil paint shall be treated with one coat of alkali resisting priming paint<br />

applied by brush and allowed to completely harden .<br />

4 Fibre Boards etc.<br />

SOFT BOARDS : where used externally or under humid conditions will receive one coat of priming paint<br />

and one coat of undercoat on back , face and edges .<br />

SOFT BOARDS : where used internally will receive one coat of priming paint and one coat of emulsion<br />

paint on back , face and edges .<br />

HARD BOARD : composite panels will be treated in the same way as soft boards under humid conditions .<br />

ACOUSTIC BOARDS : will be treated on the face in the same way as plaster , but the paint may be<br />

applied by spray ; the backs and edges should not be treated .<br />

5 Steelwork Including Windows , Louvers etc. Internally And Externally<br />

If delivered galvanised , the surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease and dirt before priming . Where<br />

rusting has occurred through damage to the galvanizing, such rust shall be removed by wire brushing back<br />

to clean metal and the galvanizing made good with a rust inhibiting agent .<br />

The surface shall then be treated with one coat of mordant solution and one coat of zinc chromate priming<br />

paint.<br />

If delivered primed , the surfaces shall be examined to ascertain that the priming paint is hard , firmly<br />

adhering and in good condition . If not satisfactory , the priming paint shall be removed and the surfaces<br />

cleaned to remove rust, and reprimed . If the condition of the priming paint is satisfactory , the surfaces<br />

shall be cleaned to remove grease and dirt , minor damage to the priming paint being made good with red<br />

oxide priming paint after removal of rust .<br />

If delivered unprimed and not galvanised , the surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease and dirt , and wire<br />

brushed and scraped to remove all rust and scale before applying a red oxide priming paint .<br />

Priming paint shall be brushed well into the surface and shall be allowed to dry and harden thoroughly<br />

before the application of subsequent coats .<br />

Items of steelwork such as frames to roller shutters , covers to expansion joints etc., which are to be built<br />

into walls , shall first be primed .<br />

6 Exposed Service Pipes<br />

Copper and brass pipework shall have the surfaces slightly abraded with glass paper and white spirit or<br />

similar solvent and wiped clean . No priming paint will be necessary , the surfaces being finished in two<br />

coats of gloss paint.<br />

Steel pipes will be treated as for steelwork with the exception that galvanised pipes are to be treated with a<br />

zinc-chromate priming paint .<br />

61


Coated soil pipes shall be wiped clean and treated with two coats of knotting followed by priming paint as<br />

described below .<br />

7 Woodwork Required To Be Painted<br />

Surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease and dirt . The surface of teak shall be cleaned with white spirit<br />

to remove free oil . The preparation process shall then be :<br />

(a) KNOT : all knots shall be treated with shellac knotting<br />

(b)PRIME : one coat of primer shall be thoroughly applied by brush to all surfaces and when dry a<br />

further coat to be applied to end-grain surfaces .<br />

(c) STOP : when priming paint is hard , all cracks , holes , open joints etc. shall be made good with<br />

hard stopping and all open grain surfaces filled smooth with linseed oil putty or an approved filler<br />

and rubbed down with fine glass paper .<br />

No joinery shall be primed until it has been approved by the Engineer Priming shall be carried out on the<br />

site and not in the factory .<br />

Items of carpentry work which are to be built into walls etc. shall be first treated by twice coating with<br />

creosote or other approved preservative .<br />

8 Woodwork required to be not stained<br />

Surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease and dirt. The wood shall then be stopped, filled and rubbed<br />

down. In the case of teak free oil shall be removed by cleaning with white spirit.<br />

Finishing Processes<br />

9 Internal Plaster<br />

Where emulsion paint is specified three coats shall be applied by brush in addition to any priming paint .<br />

Where water paint is specified two coats shall be applied by brush in addition to the Petrifying liquid . The<br />

water paint shall be thinned to the consistency of thick cream .<br />

Where oil paint is specified this shall be two or three coat work as detailed in the particular Specification,<br />

applied by roller or brush , but not by spray , to produce hard gloss , oil gloss , eggshell or flat finish<br />

as required .<br />

The finishing coat of paint to walls and ceilings shall be applied after the completion and testing of the<br />

electrical installation . Any paint splashes on electrical fittings shall be carefully cleaned off .<br />

10 Fibre Boards etc.<br />

Both acoustic and plain soft or hard boards will be treated as for plaster , but the paint may be applied by<br />

spray .<br />

Water paint or emulsion paint shall be applied by brush to the specification of the manufacturers. Where a<br />

board is likely to be exposed to extreme humidity, i.e kitchen and external corridors and covered ways , an<br />

oil paint shall be used on the face after fixing .<br />

11 Unplastered Blockwork Or Concrete<br />

As for internal plastered surfaces .<br />

62


Externally a cement type paint may be used , and shall be applied keeping a constantly wet edge , in strict<br />

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions .<br />

12 Steelwork And Exposed Service Pipes<br />

Internally, apply one coat gloss paint over two undercoats .<br />

Non-ferrous pipes shall be finished in two coats of gloss paint .<br />

Externally , apply two coats gloss paint over one undercoat .<br />

13 Woodwork Required To Be Painted<br />

As for steelwork .<br />

14 Woodwork Required To Be Stained And Polyurethaned<br />

The woodwork , internally and externally , shall be stained as directed on site, rubbed down , brushed off ,<br />

and treated with two coats of polyurethane .<br />

15 Protection Of Factory Finished Work<br />

The contractor is to allow for protecting all factory finished doors, frames windows , suspended ceilings<br />

and the like at all times to ensure that factory finishes are not damaged and must make good or replace a<br />

defective component at his own expense .<br />

63


GLAZING<br />

1 Sheet Glass<br />

Sheet glass shall be flat-drawn clear sheet glass, of the substances shown below.<br />

Nominal<br />

Approximate Normal Maximum<br />

Limits of thickness<br />

Substance or<br />

Weight<br />

Size<br />

thickness mm inch lb/ft2 inch<br />

20oz 2.75-3.05 0.108-0.120 1 1/2 80x48<br />

26oz 3.1-3.50 0.1 22-0.138 1 3/4 80x48<br />

32oz 3.8-4.20 0.150-0.165 2 80x48<br />

3/16 in 4.65-5.25 0.183-0.207 2 1/2 50 ft2 max width 84 in<br />

7/32 in 5.3-5.80 0.209-0.228 3 50 ft2 max width 84 in<br />

1/4 in 6.25-6.75 0.246-0.266 3 1/2 75 ft2 max width 84 in<br />

2 Plate Glass<br />

Plate glass shall be cast, rolled or drawn glass ground and polished on both surfaces , of the thickness<br />

shown below .<br />

Limits For Clear Plate Glass<br />

Nominal<br />

Approximate Normal Maximum<br />

Limits of thickness<br />

Substance or<br />

Weight<br />

Size<br />

thickness mm inch lb/ft2 inch<br />

3/16 3.97-5.56 0.156-0.219 2 1/2 100x72<br />

1/4 5.56-7.94 0.219-0.312 3 1/4 175x98<br />

3/8 9.13-10.72 0.359-0.422 5 280x130<br />

1/2 11.91-13.49 0.469-0.531 6 1/2 156x96<br />

3 Obscured Glass<br />

Obscured glass shall be figured rolled glass, and of the thicknesses shown below .<br />

Nominal<br />

Approximate Normal Maximum<br />

Limits of thickness<br />

Substance or<br />

Weight<br />

Size<br />

thickness mm inch lb/ft2 inch<br />

1/8 2.94-4.4 0.116-0.173 1 1/2 100x48<br />

3/16 4.5 -6.1 0.177-0.240 2 1/2 100x48<br />

1/4 6.0 -7.0 0.237-0.276 3 1/2 100x48<br />

64


4 Wired Glass<br />

Wired glass shall be polished Georgian wired having both surfaces ground and polished and with<br />

square mesh inserted during rolling of the thicknesses shown below .<br />

Nominal<br />

thickness<br />

Limits For Wired Glass<br />

Limits of thickness<br />

Approximate<br />

Weight<br />

mm inch lb/ft2 inch<br />

1/4 5.5-7.2 0.216-0.283 3 ½ 130x72<br />

Normal Maximum<br />

Size<br />

5 Heat - Absorbing Glass<br />

Heat - absorbing glass shall be floated glass substantially opaque to infra-red radiations of the<br />

thicknesses shown below .<br />

Nominal thickness : 6mm<br />

Light transmittance : 0.49<br />

Reflectance : 0.10<br />

Absorptance : 0.34<br />

Shading coefficient : 0.76<br />

Normal maximum size: 4500 x 2500mm<br />

Limits For Heat Absorbing Plate Glass<br />

6 Armourplate Glass<br />

Armourplate glass shall be toughened safety glass made of heat treated polished plate of the thickness<br />

shown below .<br />

Limits For Armourplate Glass<br />

Nominal<br />

thickness<br />

Approximate Normal Maximum<br />

Limits of thickness<br />

Weight<br />

Size<br />

mm inch lb/ft2 inch<br />

1/4 5.56-7.94 0.219-.312 3 ½ 2600x1520<br />

3/8 9.13-10.72 0.359-0.422 5 3950x1520<br />

1/2 11.91-13.49 0.469-0.531 6 ½ 3950x1520<br />

7 Mirror Glass<br />

Mirror glass shall be silvering Quality polished plate glass silvered on one side , copper-backed ,<br />

varnished and painted of the thickness given in clause 2.02 . Edges of mirrors shall be beveled .<br />

8 Putty<br />

Putty shall only be used when specified in the Particular Specification and where possible materials<br />

described in 14.01 shall be used .<br />

Putty for glazing to metal shall be tropical grade metallic glazing quality and shall be approved .<br />

9 Glazing Beads<br />

65


Wooden glazing beads shall be of teak, splayed and rounded to the sizes shown on the Drawings and<br />

neatly mitered and bradded .<br />

Metal beads shall be supplied with metal windows and doors and these shall be sprung or screwed on<br />

according to design .<br />

10 Glazing To Wood Without Beads<br />

The rebates shall be previously treated with one coat of priming paint and the bedding putty inserted .<br />

The glass shall be embedded in the putty and secured by sprigs .The front putty shall be inserted to<br />

form a triangular miter filling from the edge of the rebate to 2mm from the sight line . The bedding<br />

putty shall be trimmed off level with the sight line to form a neat back putty .<br />

When the putty has hardened sufficiently the painting shall be carried out and care shall be taken to<br />

seal the joint between putty and glass by painting up to the sight line .<br />

11 Glazing To Wood With Beads<br />

The rebates shall be previously treated with one coat of priming paint and the bedding putty inserted .<br />

The glass shall be embedded in the putty and secured by the beads .<br />

The bedding putty shall be trimmed off level with the sight line to from a neat back putty and the<br />

painting shall be carried out .<br />

12 Glazing To Metal Without Beads<br />

The rebate shall be previously treated either by rust proofing or priming as described elsewhere and the<br />

bedding putty inserted. The glass shall be embedded in the putty and secured by pegs or clips inserted<br />

in holes in the rebates.<br />

The front putty shall be inserted to from a triangular mitred filling from the edge of the rebate to 2mm<br />

back from the sight line. The bedding putty shall be trimmed off level with the sight line to from a neat<br />

back putty. When the putty has hardened sufficiently the painting shall be carried out and care shall be<br />

taken to seal the joint between putty and glass by painting up to the sight line .<br />

13 Glazing To Metal With Beads<br />

The rebates shall be previously treated by rust proofing or priming as described elsewhere and the<br />

bedding putty inserted .The glass shall be embedded in the putty and secured by the Beads . The<br />

bedding putty shall be trimmed off level with the sight line to from a neat back putty and painting shall<br />

be carried out .<br />

14 Glazing Without Putty<br />

Where specified, wash leather , ribbon velvet , flannel , felt , asbestos or similar materials shall be<br />

used in place of putty forinternal glazing in conjunction with beads . The material should be fitted so<br />

that it covers all parts of the glass which will be covered by the rebate and bead .<br />

15 Mirrors<br />

Mirrors shall be fixed to walls with compressive spacers, fibre washers and chromium plated dome -<br />

headed screws, screwed into prepared plugs let into walls and set flush with surrounding wall finish .<br />

Mirrors used as wardrobe doors or as wall linings are to be bedded with an approved mastic on a<br />

painted block - board backing not less than 12mm (1/2") thick to walls and 18mm (3/4") thick to doors.<br />

Glass sizes will be whole size to doors and minimum 900mm (3'0") wide to wall linings unless<br />

otherwise detailed , and backings continuous where possible .<br />

Joints in backings must coincide with joints in mirrors .<br />

66


16 Cleaning etc<br />

The Contractor shall replace all scratched, cracked or borken glass and clean all glazing on both sides<br />

and all mirrors before handing over .<br />

67


SECTION 13.00<br />

MECHANICAL WORKS<br />

1 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS<br />

1.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION<br />

The work under this section of the specifications shall include all above ground drainage<br />

pipework waste, soil, and rain water, complete with all drains, traps, gullies, cleanouts,<br />

vents and all accessories, as shown on the drawings and as specified hereafter.<br />

The above ground drainage pipes shall mean all pipework inside buildings and located as<br />

follows:-<br />

- Above floor slab<br />

- Under tiles<br />

- In walls<br />

- At high level or low level exposed or concealed<br />

- All vertical pipes (risers)<br />

1.02 PIPEWORK-GENERAL<br />

The pipes and fittings used for above ground drainage installations shall unplasticised<br />

polyvinyl chloride UPVC and shall conform BS 4514 and BS 5255.<br />

All change in direction in drainage pipes shall be gradual and not abrupt.<br />

Long sweep fittings and 45-degree fittings, of solvent weld sockets type shall be used.<br />

All pipes shall be plain ended lengths for solvent weld or seal ring connection to all<br />

fittings.<br />

Slope of horizontal pipes shall be not less than 1% and not more than 3%.<br />

All pipe jointing and supporting shall be made as recommended by the pipes manufacturer.<br />

All pipes and fittings including adapters, couplings and connectors shall be supplied by the<br />

same manufacturer and marked with the manufacturer name, BS. number and diameter.<br />

All pipes and fittings which serves areas of hot effluent waste water such as kitchens,<br />

laundries, and CSSD of cast iron to BS 416 or ANSI/A21 spigot or hubless type.<br />

Hubless cast iron system for waste and soil pipe and fittings shall utilize a sleeve-types<br />

coupling device consisting of an internally ripped elastomeric sealing gasket with a<br />

protective corrugated stainless steel shield by stainless steel bands with stainless steel<br />

tighting devices.<br />

1.03 JOINTS AND CONNECTORS<br />

All joints for above ground drainage pipework, except for expansion joints, shall be made<br />

by solvent weld jointing, using the solvent weld cement as recommended by the<br />

manufacturer.<br />

Solvent weld socket shall be used to connect two lengths of pipes.<br />

Seal ring coupling (expansion joint) fitted with black rubber seal ring shall be provided for<br />

each vertical pipe (not embedded) located between every two floors, and for horizontal<br />

pipes (not embedded) at 4.0 m. intervals. The conversion from solvent weld joint pipe to<br />

seal ring expansion joints shall be made by adding seal ring adapters.<br />

The connection of UPVC pipes to all water closets shall be made by WC-connector with<br />

solvent weld socket and pan seal socket.<br />

Special UPVC connectors and adapters shall be used for connecting the pipes with<br />

dissimilar material of other pipes or fittings such as bottle traps, P-traps of plumbing<br />

fixtures.<br />

The coupling assembly of cast iron pipes consists of a stainless steel shield, ban and<br />

tightening device, and a neoprene gasket, assembled at the factory as a complete unit.<br />

All UPVC pipes which penetrates slabs between two different one hour fire zones, shall<br />

fitted with fire protection seals. Such seals shall comprise of sheet metal collars containing<br />

an intumescent material which expands rapidly when subjected to intense heat.<br />

The connection between vertical pipes and under-ground pipes shall be made by long<br />

radius sockets bend fitted with rubber seal rings.


All hangers and supports shall be of approved types, as recommended by the pipes<br />

manufacturer.<br />

1.04 WATER PROOFING<br />

Where UPVC pipes pass through roofs, they shall be provided with UPVC weathering<br />

apron and slate to make watertight seal around the pipes at roof level.<br />

The method of water proofing shall be made as per the manufacturer instructions.<br />

1.05 CLEANOUTS<br />

- Cleanouts shall be installed, to provide access to waste and soil pipes for<br />

inspection or cleaning. All cleanouts types shall be UPVC.<br />

- Cleanouts shall be provided as shown on the drawings, at or near the foot of every<br />

vertical stack and no long horizontal pipe tuns at every 15 meter intervals.<br />

- Cleanouts on horizontal pipes (not buried) shall be UPVC access cap solvent<br />

weld to any socketed fitting fitted with screw cap and washer complete with<br />

PTFE tape to seal thread.<br />

- Cleanouts on horizontal and vertical pipes (not fitted to the fittings), shall be<br />

made by access pipe with 75 mm. diameter, opening for access and sealed with<br />

screwed cover.<br />

- All fittings used for the connection between horizontal pipe and vertical pipe (not<br />

buried) shall be fitted with access doors secured by two zinc plated screws and<br />

captive nuts.<br />

1.06 CLEANOUTS<br />

The floor drain type (FD) shall be UPVC trapped floor gully with 110m. dia. top socket,<br />

three side inlet sockets, and one 75 mm. dia. outlet socket equipped with screwed plug for<br />

rodding.<br />

Each side inlet socket shall be 50 mm. dia. blanked off and must be cut out of inlet used.<br />

The top socket shall be fitted with 110 mm. dia. raising piece with a 150 mm. square top to<br />

suit standard floor tiles, together with a snap-in cover that provides channel for disposal of<br />

surface water.<br />

1.07 FLOOR DRAIN -TYPE (FD-1)<br />

Floor drains type (FD-1) shall consist of 100 mm. dia. UPVC p-trap, stainless steel strainer<br />

size 150 x 150 mm and connecting pipe piece between p-trap and strainer.<br />

1.08 ROOF DRAIN-TYPE (RD)<br />

Roof drain shall be UPVC Domed type supplied with socket outlet of size to fit with the<br />

rainwater pipes as shown on the drawings.<br />

Roof drain shall be complete with removable domed grid, screws and polypropylene<br />

washer.<br />

Roof drains shall be installed and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer instructions.<br />

1.09 BALCONY DRAIN-TYPE (BD)<br />

Balcony drain shall be UPVC supplied with socket outlet of 3" diameter.<br />

Balcony drain shall be complete with grid, screws, washers and spacer.<br />

Balcony drains shall be installed and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer<br />

instructions.<br />

1.10 ROOF VENT COWL -TYPE (RVC)<br />

Roof vent cowl shall be provided for all vent pipes as shown on the drawings.<br />

Roof vent cowl shall be UPVC with screened cap and connected to the vent pipe by<br />

solvent welding.


1.11-TESTING<br />

The work shall be inspected and tested during installation.<br />

All work which will be concealed shall be tested before it is finally enclosed.<br />

A final test shall be made upon completion of the work for soundness and performance in<br />

accordance with BS 5572: 1978 Code of practice for Sanitary Pipework.


2 COLD WATER SERVICES<br />

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />

The cold water system shall be executed as shown on the drawings, complete with all<br />

water distribution piping, water reservoir piping, roof water tanks, pumps, etc.<br />

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the main cold water supply pipe and<br />

accessories from the city mains including obtaining the necessary permits, performing all<br />

legal matters and making the tie-in to the water source in accordance with local codes,<br />

regulations and requirements of the water authorities having jurisdiction and including the<br />

provision of the water meter or orifice installation as might be required and as instructed<br />

by the authorities or the Engineer, all on his own account.<br />

Underground water pipes shall not be run in the same trench as sewer pipes. Adequate<br />

precautions shall be taken for protecting underground water pipes from contamination<br />

from any source.<br />

2.02 PIPEWORK<br />

A. General<br />

Pipework inside buildings shall follow the lines of walls vertically and<br />

horizontally and shall be graded as necessary for draining and venting. Joints in<br />

pipework shall not be made within walls or floors. Where pipes pass through<br />

these structures, they shall be sleeved. Where pipes pass through walls, floors, or<br />

ceiling exposed to view, they shall be fitted with chrome plated pipe covers.<br />

During the course of construction, open ends of pipework shall be sealed with<br />

compression type stop ends. Paper or wood will not be allowed.<br />

All pipe penetrations of lower and upper deck slabs and planters shall be made<br />

with puddle flanges.<br />

All connections of plastic pipes or copper tubes to threaded fittings shall be via<br />

adapters. Cut threads shall not be allowed.<br />

For more details refer to section (2).<br />

B. Underground Pipework<br />

Underground pipework shall be laid at a depth of a 900mm below finished level<br />

and bedded on sand with a compaction ratio of less than 0.15, or small gravel.<br />

Initial backfill to a cover of 300mm shall be hand consolidated. Backfill material<br />

shall be no greater than capable of passing through a 20mrn diameter B.S. 1377<br />

sieve. Mechanical ramming of subsequent backfill shall not commence until at<br />

least 300mm cover has been hand compacted.<br />

C. Building Domestic Cold Water Pipework<br />

1. Potable Water<br />

Domestic cold water pipework feeding water reservoir shall be of<br />

galvanized steel manufactured to BS 1387 class B standards.<br />

2. All domestic cold water pipework (except sanitary distribution<br />

pipework) shall be copper tube to BS 2871 part (1) table (X) half hard<br />

tubes supplied in straight lengths.<br />

For more details refer to section (2).<br />

2.03 VALVES<br />

All valves shall be as detailed in section (2).<br />

Valves installed inside water distribution cabinets shall be as specified elsewhere in these<br />

specifications.<br />

The valves shall be as specified in section (2) of the specifications.<br />

2.04 THERMAL INSULATION


All cold water pipework exposed to view on roof shall be insulated and cladded as called<br />

for in section (2) of the specifications.<br />

All other cold water pipework in shafts, voids, in walls, under tile, etc., shall not be<br />

insulated.<br />

2.05 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING<br />

The testing and commissioning of the cold water services shall be carried out as described<br />

in section (2) of these specifications.<br />

2.06 SANITARY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM<br />

2.06.1 General<br />

Sanitary distribution system shall include water distribution cabinets, cold and<br />

hot water distribution and connection to sanitary taps.<br />

The installations shall be as recommended by the manufacturers.<br />

2.06.2 Water Distribution Cabinets<br />

The cabinet shall be stove enameled wall hung type on wall bearing hanger, and<br />

shall be exposed in the service shaft for maintenance.<br />

The depth of the cabinet shall be 110 mm, and the dimensions shall be selected<br />

according to the length of manifolds required as shown on the water distribution<br />

cabinets’ schedules drawings, and to be sufficient for the installation of all valves<br />

and fittings inside the cabinets.<br />

Where the cabinets located within walls of ceramic tiles finish, the cabinets shall<br />

be provided with heavy duty hinged type cover. The cover shall be of 10mm<br />

thick fitted with ceramic tiles. The cover shall be provided with locking<br />

mechanism. Cabinets and covers shall be approved by the Consultant.<br />

The cabinets shall include the following components:<br />

A. Cold and Hot Water Manifolds<br />

The manifold shall be made from extrusive shaped, lead free dezincification<br />

resistant, brass bar with ends female threaded, and supplied with the required<br />

outlets: manufactured to BS 864 part 3.<br />

Fittings shall be of types as recommended by the manufacturer.<br />

Fittings shall be of non manipulative compression type to BS 864 Part 3 all<br />

resistant to dezincification.<br />

The manifold size shall be of the same internal bore as CWS & HWS feeder.<br />

The outlet size shall be of the same internal bore as PEX pipes<br />

distribution to the sanitary taps.<br />

The connection of manifolds and outlets to copper and plastic tubes shall be made<br />

properly using adaptors with O-rings. Outlets that are not required, they shall be<br />

blanked off with plug and washer.<br />

The manifolds shall be supported on the cabinet with adjustable horizontal<br />

brackets.<br />

B) Isolating Valves<br />

Isolating valves shall be installed on CWS & HWS feeders to manifolds and to<br />

each individual pipe connections to manifolds outlets.<br />

The isolating valves shall be standard port ball valves with T-handle, chrome<br />

plated dezincification free brass.<br />

The valve size shall be of the same bore as the pipework connections. Isolating<br />

valves shall be connected to the CWS and HWS feeders by copper elbows and<br />

fittings.<br />

C) Automatic Air Vents<br />

Automatic air vent of 12mm diameter shall be provided on each manifold.<br />

2.06..3 Sanitary Distribution Pipework<br />

The sanitary pipework for cold water and hot water distribution from the water<br />

distribution cabinets to the taps, mixers, etc. shall be cross linked polyethylene


plastic pipes, manufactured to ASTM F 876 -84 , ASTM F877-84 and shall<br />

comply with and approved by the National Sanitation Fund NSF. Pressure grade<br />

shall be 20 bar.<br />

The pipes shall run in conduits (sleeves) to each individual outlet without using<br />

any fittings along to the distribution cabinets.<br />

The pipes shall be flexible type delivered coiled.<br />

The gap between the conduit and the pipe connected to the manifold outlet shall<br />

be sealed with approved rubber ring.<br />

2.06.4 Connections to Sanitary Fixtures<br />

The connections of PEX pipes to the tapes , mixers etc., shall be made using<br />

dezincification resistant brass elbow/adapter housed in PVC box (Termination<br />

Box) built inside the wall. The boxes shall have provision for incoming flexible<br />

conduit.<br />

The termination box shall have compression connection for PEX pipe on one side<br />

and female thread for the tap, mixer connection on other.<br />

The complete assembly shall be such that the PEX pipe can be withdrawn and<br />

replaced without damaging the wall finish.<br />

The connection of elbow to the tap, mixer etc. shall be made using chrome plated<br />

angle valve complete with flexible connection<br />

2.08 FLOAT VALVES<br />

Float valves shall be of all bronze construction including levers and arms, with copper<br />

float and shall be suitable for a cold water working pressure of 10 bar. Float valves size 50<br />

mm. and smaller shall have screwed inlets and size 65 mm. and larger shall have flanged<br />

inlets.<br />

Float valves shall be of the full bore, equilibrium ball type, designed to close tight against<br />

maximum pressure when half submerged. They shall have renewable synthetic rubber<br />

valve disk and balancing piston bucket.<br />

Float valves shall conform to BS 1212 and BS 1968.<br />

2.09 WATER TANKS<br />

Provision includes supply, delivery, installing, testing, commissioning, leaving in complete<br />

working order, and maintaining during the defects liability period water storage tank as<br />

indicated on the drawing. The tank shall be constructed by hot-press molding and GRP panel<br />

insulation. Capacity and dimensions of the tank shall be as indicated on the drawing. The tank<br />

shall be provided with heavy duty cover formed from standard panels and complete with<br />

manholes and air vents.<br />

Panels are molded at temperatures of up to 150°C, attaining the maximum material properties.<br />

The GRP panels shall be convex shaped and sandwiched with rigid polyurethane foam<br />

insulation of minimum of 25mm thickness. The insulated panels are used for the side, bottom<br />

and roof of the tank. The tanks shall have smooth internal and external finish to floors, walls<br />

and roof to prevent formation of algae, bacteria or fungi and to allow easy cleaning.<br />

The panels shall not allow ultra-violet ray penetration. The panels must be fully pigmented and<br />

combined with UV stabilized resins to prevent any light penetration which may cause algae<br />

growth.<br />

Tanks shall be constructed in metric molded in configurations of 2m x 1m or 1m x 1m, or<br />

multiples thereof for side panels as per manufacturer’s design. Panel sections are assembled<br />

with synthetic rubber sealant and bolted together with stainless steel SS 316 grade assembly<br />

bolts. The tank cover shall be provided with purpose made manholes. All bolts, nuts, flanges<br />

etc., in the water tank shall be in stainless grade SS 316.<br />

The water tank shall be mounted firmly on to a cross girder type of steel skid base over the<br />

concrete base. Tank shall be provided with a bracing system that is designed and optimized to<br />

limit deformation of the structure and avoid point loadings on the panel. The panels to be<br />

rigidly supported by a combination of stainless steel SS316 tie-rods internally and galvanized<br />

box sections externally or with external bracings only as per the manufacturer’s design and hot<br />

press molded GRP corner sections. The roof panels shall be supported internally by UPVC<br />

tubular roof support struts.


Tanks shall be fitted with PVC internal ladders and external aluminum access ladders air vent<br />

made of PVC with insect screen shall be included. The water tank shall be provided with<br />

plastic water level indicator complete with isolating valves.<br />

The tank shall be filled with water and allowed to stand for 48 hours and to be examined for<br />

leaks and repaired as necessary.<br />

2.10 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER<br />

a) Type: Electric water cooler (Ref: W/C) shall be free floor-standing. The capacity<br />

of the water cooler shall be 14 GPH<br />

b) Connections: The water cooler shall be provided with electrical, water and waste<br />

connections.<br />

c) Filter: The water cooler shall be complete with cartridge type water filter.<br />

Sediment cartridge shall be of durable molded polystyrene of 5 micron filtration<br />

type.<br />

The water filter shall be mounted on wall with factory supplied brackets.<br />

The water piping connections shall be made via chrome plated angle valve and<br />

flexible connections to the water supply outlet.<br />

d) Top and cabinet: water cooler top shall be highly polished stainless steel with full<br />

length anti-splash ridge and integral strainer. The power supply shall be 240/1/50.<br />

The top of water cooler shall be provided with one tap for drinking of<br />

adjustable type, and other tap for cup drink. The water cooler cabinet shall be of<br />

heavy gauge stainless steel.<br />

e) Condensing unit and tank: Condensing units shall be hermetically sealed and<br />

lubricated for life. Cooling tank shall be of brass, tinned and have a minimum<br />

working pressure of 10bar.


3 HOT WATER SERVICES<br />

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />

The hot water system shall be executed as shown on the drawings, complete with all water<br />

distribution piping.<br />

3.02 PIPEWORK GENERAL<br />

Pipework inside buildings shall follow the lines of walls vertically and horizontally,<br />

and shall be graded as necessary for draining and venting. Joints in pipework shall<br />

not be made within walls or floors, and where pipes pass through these structures<br />

they shall be sleeved. Where pipes pass through walls, floors, or ceiling exposed to<br />

view, they shall be fitted with chrome plated pipe covers (rosettes). During the<br />

course of construction, open ends of pipework shall be capped with compression<br />

type stop ends. Paper or wooden sealing ends will not be allowed.<br />

All pipe penetrations of lower and upper deck slabs and planters shall be made with puddle<br />

flanges.<br />

All hot water pipework from mechanical room to the building shall be laid inside concrete<br />

trench (together with other pipes) as shown on the drawings.<br />

Concrete trench details shall be as shown on the structural drawings.<br />

All connections of copper tubes to threaded fittings shall be via adapters. Cut threads shall<br />

not be allowed.<br />

3.03 DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPEWORK<br />

A. General<br />

All domestic hot water pipework inside pump room internal external, and exposed<br />

on roof shall be copper tube to BS 2871 Part (1) Table (X) half hard tubes supplied<br />

in straight lengths.<br />

For more details refer to section (2).<br />

3.04 VALVES<br />

All valves generally shall be as detailed in section (2).<br />

Valves installed inside water distribution cabinets shall be as specified elsewhere in these<br />

specifications.<br />

3.05 STRAINERS<br />

All strainers shall be of 10 bar working pressure rating.<br />

Strainers shall be Y-type, with 26-mesh stainless steel screen with 0.8 mm diameter<br />

perforations.<br />

Strainers shall be bronze threaded to BS 21, for sizes up to and including 50 mm, and cast<br />

iron flanged to BS 4504 for larger sizes.<br />

3.06 THERMAL INSULATION<br />

All hot water supply and return pipework (excluding sanitary distribution pipework) shall be<br />

insulated and cladded as called for in section (2).<br />

3.07 TESTING<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that all pipework is completely clear of obstructions, debris, or<br />

superfluous matter before any tests are applied. Pipework shall be slowly filled with water,<br />

so as to exclude all air. The pipework shall be tested at 10 bar or 1.5 times the maximum<br />

pressure in the system (whichever is greater) for a period of two hours without loss.<br />

The Contractor shall give the Engineer 2 working days notice of his intention to test a<br />

section of pipework. The Contractor must ensure that each test is witnessed by the Engineer<br />

and shall maintain signed test reports for the complete installation.<br />

All items of plant and pipework which are individually pressure tested may be isolated from<br />

the system (using blanking plates) for the duration of the test. However, the complete system<br />

shall then be pressure tested for working pressure after successful pressure testing as<br />

described above.


4 FUEL INSTALLATIONS<br />

4.01 LPG Storage Cylinders<br />

Two banks, one for On-Duty and another for Stand-by operations, for refilling the storage<br />

cylinders shall be provided to serve the kitchen. The two banks shall comprise of:-<br />

- Gas manifold<br />

- Pressure regulator<br />

- Automatic change-over valve<br />

- A manual changeover valve for emergency<br />

- Five on Duty and five stand by 50 kg cylinders with isolating valve for each cylinder<br />

- Manifold Control Panel connected to BMS system to indicate the one system is empty<br />

The storage cylinders shall be of the locally approved types and in compliance to AOTC<br />

rules and recognized Pressure Vessel Codes. They shall be supported on angle steel racks at<br />

least 10cm above ground and protected against vandalism by mean of chains & locks.<br />

Cylinders shall be located under sun shades to be protected from direct sunlight.<br />

Manifolds Control Panel:<br />

The two banks of headers shall connect to a control panel which shall automatically reduce<br />

the high pressure gas to a low distribution gauge pressure.<br />

4.02 Gas Manifold Header:<br />

Each bank of cylinders shall be located beneath a high pressure Manifold Header securely<br />

mounted to the wall at either side of a centrally mounted control panel. The headers shall<br />

carry flexible spiral pigtail pipe on the underside for connecting to the cylinders and each<br />

tail pipe shall incorporate a renewable non-return valve on the manifold header to allow<br />

removal and replacement of any cylinder without interrupting the supply from others in the<br />

same bank.<br />

The manifold shall be fabricated from black steel pipe and black malleable iron threaded<br />

fittings complete with shut off valves and pigtail connections. The pigtail connections shall<br />

be of steel tubes with compression threaded type adopter and swivel nuts for connecting<br />

manifold to cylinders.<br />

Pressure Gauges:<br />

The control panel shall incorporate three pressure gauges; one high pressure gauge to each<br />

cylinder bank and one common pressure gauge on the outgoing supply to the distribution<br />

pipework.<br />

The gauges shall conform to B5.1780 and be of the safety pattern to Appendix D with<br />

special precautions to Appendix E and be graduated in (bars) and in (psi).<br />

Each gauge shall carry the name of the gas on the dial face with warning-“USE NO OIL OR<br />

GREASE”.<br />

Gauges shall be degreased and maintained in this condition before and after installation.<br />

Isolating valve or cocks shall NOT be provided to gauge connections.<br />

The dials shall be marked with a blue line at the normal working pressure and a red lne at<br />

the minimum allowable pressure.<br />

Control Panel Identification:<br />

Control panel shall carry in large letters on the front the name of the gas being controled, the<br />

letters shall be embossed, engraved or otherwise marked on so indelible. Painting or<br />

adhesive lettering shall not be permitted.<br />

4.03 Pipework and Fittings<br />

All materials shall be resistant to the corrosive action of LPG and shall be of seamless to<br />

BS1387 heavy gage with black threaded malleable iron fittings for pipes less than or equal<br />

to 50mm and of welded black steel fittings for sizes over 50mm.<br />

All Horizontal pipe work shall be sloped not less than 2% toward risers and appliances.


All pipeworks rimming in buildings shall be installed overhead and close to walls. They<br />

shall not be buried or concealed, or connected by unions, running threads pr sing joints.<br />

Branching shall be taken off for top of pipe.<br />

Drip Legs shall be provided at bottom of all risers in locations readily accessible for<br />

cleaning and emptying.<br />

All screwed joints shall be made by approved PTFE tape. Sealants of thread shall be of<br />

material suitable to LPG applications.<br />

Valves shall be constructed to BS 2789 of steel, screwed bronze or flanged brass only.


5 HEATING SYSTEM<br />

5.00 GENERAL<br />

This Section of the specification covers the heating installations comprising: boilers, pumps,<br />

radiators, expansion tank and all related works as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.<br />

5.01 HOT WATER HEATING BOILER<br />

A. General description and Requirements<br />

The hot water heating boiler shall be of the fully packaged, designed and constructed in<br />

accordance with the latest ASME Code<br />

The boiler shall be equipped with integral forced draft fuel burning equipment specifically<br />

supplied for burning No.2 light oil, boiler trim and accessories, operating and safety<br />

controls, refractory and insulation all assembled, piped and wired at the factory and<br />

delivered as a packaged unit ready for installation and operation with simple piping, power<br />

and smoke outlet connections. The complete packaged boiler shall be approved as a unit by<br />

the Underwriters' Laboratory and shall bear its label.<br />

The completed unit shall be fire tested at the factory prior to shipment and a copy of the<br />

test report shall be furnished with the boiler.<br />

The boiler shall be subjected to shop inspection and approval by an authorized Boiler<br />

Inspection and Insurance Co., and stamped with all identifying markings and symbols as<br />

required by the ASME Code. A certified inspection report shall be furnished with the<br />

boiler.<br />

The boiler shall be insulated with minimum 75 mm thick mineral wool blanket insulation<br />

compacted to 50 mm and covered with heavy gauge steel removable jacket with factory<br />

applied heat resisting enamel finish.<br />

The fuel burning equipment shall be of the forced draft type and shall comprise but not<br />

necessarily limited to: flange mounted oil burner of the mechanical pressure atomizing<br />

type for No.2 light oil, direct driven blower, motor, air damper, two stage oil pump<br />

mounted on burner, oil atomizing nozzle, oil solenoid valve, oil control valve, oil supply<br />

and return pressure gauges, fuel suction strainer, ignition transformer, ignition electrodes,<br />

air flow safety switch, electronic flame sensing devices, low fire start interlock, working<br />

temperature controls, high limit temperature controls, all necessary controls and linkage for<br />

modulating firing with proved low fire start and totally enclosed electric control panel<br />

mounted on the unit at the factory.<br />

The control panel shall contain an electronic programming combustion safeguard control<br />

system, magnetic motor starters with thermal overloads and low voltage release,<br />

combustion air proving switch, manual potentiometer, manual automatic selector switch,<br />

control circuit transformer, necessary switching relays, power on and burner on switches,<br />

individual fused circuits for controls, signal lights indicating ignition, flame failure and low<br />

water cutout, numbered terminal strip, color coded wiring and engraved nameplates.<br />

Fuel air control shall provide modulating regulation of the air damper and the oil control<br />

valve by means of a modutrol motor. The electronic programming combustion<br />

safeguard control system shall provide modulating sequence of enforced low fire start, pre<br />

purge, post purge, timed trial for ignition, proof of blower operation prior to opening of<br />

fuel valves, and positive response to shut down the burner in the event of flame failure.<br />

The boiler manufacturer shall furnish with the boiler complete shop drawings which shall<br />

include but not necessarily be limited to : complete boiler piping and wiring diagrams with<br />

details of control panel and all controls, interlocks and setting, boiler outline drawing with<br />

dimensions, location of connections and flange ratings, complete installation, operation,<br />

servicing, care and maintenance instructions, performance test report, inspection report and<br />

one year warrantee against defects.<br />

The boiler inlet and outlet pipe connections shall be provided with isolating valves and<br />

thermometers of glass stem type.<br />

The fuel oil supply pipe connection to the burner shall be provided with isolating valve, oil<br />

filter and fire safety valve. fuel oil supply and return pipes shall be connected to the boiler<br />

by heavy duty flexible connections.<br />

The boiler shall be mounted on reinforced concrete base of adequate dimensions to provide<br />

10 cms clearance on each side and above finished floor level.


B. Steel Boiler<br />

The steel boiler shall be horizontal fire tube, scotch type of 7 bars water operating pressure<br />

at 120°C.<br />

The boiler shall be mounted from the factory on a heavy structural steel skid type base.<br />

The boiler shall have not less than 0.46 m 2 of heating surface per rated boiler horsepower.<br />

The fire tubes shall be of 3mm. steel and shall be roller expanded and beaded into the tube<br />

sheets at each end. Welding of tubes into the tube sheets will not be accepted.<br />

The boiler shell longitudinal joints shall be double butt welded and the girth joints full<br />

fillet welded. All welds shall be X rayed and stress relieved as required by the ASME<br />

Code.<br />

The boiler shell shall be provided with an adequate number of 75 x 100 mm oval handhole<br />

inspection openings on the sides and bottom, with an 28 x 38 mm oval manhole on the top,<br />

with two permanently attached lifting eyes and with all necessary threaded and flanged<br />

connections for boiler drain, water column, relief valves, controls, water inlet and outlet<br />

and smoke outlet all as required by the ASME Code.<br />

The hot water outlet and return connections shall be located on the top center line of the<br />

boiler and shall be of such internal design as to provide forced internal thermal and<br />

directional circulation in order to mix the return water with the hot water within the boiler<br />

and prevent short circuiting, cold shocks and dead spots.<br />

Access doors shall be provided at front and rear of the boiler to provide full access to tube<br />

sheets and fire tubes for inspection and cleaning without disconnecting any fuel piping or<br />

electrical wiring. The access doors shall be deviated or hinged and shall be lined with high<br />

quality refractory, fully gasket and bolted on for complete gas tightness. The rear access<br />

door shall be provided with refractory lined access opening to permit entry into the rear<br />

combustion chamber without opening the door. Pyrex observation ports shall be provided<br />

at each end of boiler for inspection of flame condition.<br />

The boiler trim shall include but not necessarily be limited to :<br />

1. Relief valves of type and size to comply with the requirements of the ASME<br />

Code.<br />

2. Steel case 150 mm. dial 0-14 bar range pressure gauge with shut off cock.<br />

3. Cast brass 230 mm. scale 0 to 120 °C range red reading mercury thermometer<br />

with separable socket well and extended neck.<br />

4. Float operated low water cut off with drain valve at bottom.<br />

5. Boiler drain valve.<br />

6. Stack bimetallic thermometer.<br />

The entire boiler, base frame and other components shall be factory painted prior<br />

to shipment with a hard finish silicone enamel.<br />

C. Cast Iron Boiler<br />

The cast iron boiler shall be of cast iron sectional type complete with insulated jacket.<br />

The boiler assembly shall consist of cast iron sections and factory tested to 6 bars water<br />

operating pressure at 120 °C.<br />

The boiler shall be provided with hinged access doors and inspection openings to provide<br />

full access to all fire surfaces for inspection, cleaning and maintenance without<br />

disconnecting any fuel oil piping or electrical wiring.<br />

The access doors shall be lined with high quality refractory, fully gasket and bolted on for<br />

complete gas tightness.<br />

The boiler shall be provided with all necessary threaded and flanged connections for boiler<br />

inlet and outlet, boiler drain, relief valve, controls and smoke outlet all as required by<br />

ASME code.<br />

The boiler trim shall include but not necessarily be limited to:<br />

1- Relief valves of type and size to comply with the requirements of the ASME<br />

Code.<br />

2- Combination pressure altitude gauge and thermometer.<br />

3- Operating and high limit thermostat<br />

4- Stack bimetalic thermometer


5.02 PRESSURISING UNIT (EXPANSION TANK)<br />

Refer to section (4) of this specifications.<br />

5.03 IPEWORK<br />

Refer to section (2) of this specifications.<br />

5.04 PIPEWORK INSULATION<br />

Refer to section (2) of this specifications.<br />

5.05 VALVES<br />

Refer to section (2) of this specification<br />

5.06 STRAINERS<br />

Refer to section (2) of this specification<br />

5.07 PIPE FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS<br />

Refer to section (4) of this specification<br />

5.08 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES<br />

Refer to section (4) of this specification<br />

5.09 TWO PORT CONTROL VALVES<br />

Refer to section (4) of this specification<br />

5.10 HEATING PUMPS<br />

Split Case And End Suction Centrifugal Pump<br />

1) Foundation and Setting<br />

The pump and motor shall be mounted on a common cast iron or steel base plate<br />

adequately reinforced against deflection and provided with drip rim and bolt holes.<br />

The pump shall be directly connected to the motor through a heavy duty flexible coupling<br />

and provided with heavy gauge coupling guard from the factory. The base plate shall be<br />

securely supported on the foundation in such a way that proper pump and motor shaft<br />

alignment will be assured.<br />

Horizontal split pumps shall be of a single stage volute type , with cast iron body, fully<br />

bronze fitted, double suction inlet, bronze impeller, flanged suction and discharge<br />

connections.<br />

The base plate, with pump and motor mounted on it, shall be set level on the foundation<br />

and secured with proper size anchor bolts and completely grouted in to provide a rigid non<br />

deflating support. Pump and motor shall be aligned at the factory.<br />

Realignment is required after grouting in of base plate and after connecting piping.<br />

2) Pump Construction<br />

The pump casing shall be of high tensile strength close-grained cast iron fitted with bronze<br />

wearing rings.<br />

The impeller shall be bronze of the enclosed type and fitted to the shaft with stainless steel<br />

key. The impeller shall be dynamically balanced at the factory.<br />

The shaft shall be stainless steel amply sized to carry all axial and radial thrust. The shaft<br />

shall be protected by stainless steel sleeves.<br />

The pump rotating element shall be supported by heavy duty grease lubricated ball<br />

bearings mounted in a heavy iron housing. The bearing shall be lubricated by screw type<br />

grease cups.<br />

The pump shall be fitted with mechanical shaft seals which shall be easily removable from<br />

the stuffing boxes without disturbing motor and pump alignment.<br />

The pump shall be provided with back pull-out casing for maintenance purposes.<br />

The pump shall be provided from the factory with mating flanges for suction and discharge<br />

connections. the pump shall be provided with nameplate.<br />

The pump shall be furnished with grease lubricated outboard bearings provided with drain<br />

plugs and fittings suitable for in service lubrication.


Mechanically; sealed condensing and chilled water pumps shall be provided with balanced<br />

seals.<br />

Mechanically; sealed heating and hot water pumps shall be provided with John Crane Code<br />

Xp1d1 Type 1 unbalanced seals. Pumps provided with seals shall be provided with bronze<br />

or stainless steel shaft sleeves and stainless steel Cyclo-clean filters.<br />

Packed pumps shall be fitted with stainless steel shaft sleeves heat treated or metallized to<br />

brinell hardness 500.<br />

Stuffing box shall designed to accommodate a minimum five rings of packing plus spacer<br />

ring and shall be suitable for conversion to grease or water sealing. Packing shall be<br />

suitable for service scheduled in accordance to the pump manufacturer's<br />

recommendations.<br />

3) Operating Characteristics<br />

The pump shall be selected so that the operating point of specified flow and head falls near<br />

the point of maximum efficiency as obtained from the manufacturer published data. The<br />

pump shall never be selected to operate near the end of its curve.<br />

The pump shall deliver not less than 150 percent of rated flow at a pressure not less than 65<br />

percent of rated pressure. The shutoff pressure shall not exceed 120 percent of the rated<br />

pressure.<br />

The impeller size shall not exceed 90% of the maximum size available for pump casing.<br />

A pump satisfying the specified flow and head characteristics but with smaller impeller<br />

size will be rejected. A large pump with a smaller impeller shall be selected to satisfy the<br />

specified flow and head.<br />

4) Pump Instrumentation<br />

a) Relief Valve<br />

The pump shall be provided with a relief valve set below the shutoff pressure to<br />

provide circulation of sufficient water to prevent the pump from overheating when<br />

operating with no discharge. A 20 mm. relief valve shall be used.<br />

Provision shall be made for a discharge to drain.<br />

The relief valve shall be located between the pump and pump discharge check<br />

valve.<br />

b) Automatic Air Release Valve<br />

Each pump shall be provided with float operated air release valve not less than 15<br />

mm. size, to automatically release air from the pump.<br />

c) Pressure Gauges<br />

A pressure gauge shall be connected to the discharge and suction side of the pump<br />

casing.<br />

d) Valves and Fittings<br />

- Gate valves shall be installed on the suction and discharge piping of the<br />

pump.<br />

- Globe valve shall be installed on the discharge bypass piping of the<br />

pump.<br />

- Check valve shall be installed on the pump discharge piping.<br />

- Strainer Y-type shall be installed on the suction piping of the pump.<br />

- Flexible connections shall be installed on the suction and discharge<br />

piping of the pumps.<br />

- All valves, strainers and fittings shall be of the same size as the pipe<br />

which they are installed.<br />

e. In Line Centrifugal circulating Pump<br />

The Contractor shall supply and install in line circulating pumps as shown and<br />

detailed on the drawings.<br />

The pump shall be inline close coupled single suction centrifugal type. The pump<br />

shall have suction and discharge flanges of the same diameter and on the same<br />

centreline.


The pump motor shall be of squirrel cage induction type rated for continuous<br />

operation at ambient temperature not less than 40°C.<br />

The motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type with insulation class F and<br />

IP54 protection.<br />

The pump casing shall be of bronze or cast iron with gun metal impeller and<br />

stainless steel shaft. The construction shall have a pressure rating not less than 10<br />

Bar at 85°C.<br />

Pipe connections including fittings, valves, instrumentations etc. shall be as<br />

shown on the drawings.<br />

Impeller sizes shall not exceed 80% of maximum size available for pump casing.<br />

5.11 PACKAGED VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS<br />

Refer to section (4) of this specification<br />

5.12 SMOKE PIPES<br />

A. Construction<br />

1. The smoke pipes for chimney stack and breaching shall be manufactured in<br />

accordance with DIN 18160 under quality controlled factory conditions. It shall<br />

be of twin wall construction having a 25mm insulated annuals between the inner<br />

and outer casing. For the exposed chimney the insulation thickness shall be<br />

50mm.<br />

2. chimney sections and fittings shall twist lock together with a 1/8 turn using<br />

mating male and female couplers. A locking bank secured by a toggle clip, shall<br />

be fitted at each joint. The outer casing shall be fixed to the couplers at each end<br />

and shall form the structural load bearing component. The inner liner shall be free<br />

to move as the flue gas temperature fluctuates.<br />

B. Approval License<br />

Smoke pipes should be provided with the DIN 18160 – approval mark.<br />

C. Quality Assurance<br />

The smoke pipes shall be manufactured under a Quality Assurance scheme administered<br />

by the British Standards Institute in accordance with BS 5750 part 2:1987, ISO 9002-1987,<br />

EN 29002-1987. Copies of appropriate certificates to be provided by the manufacturer.<br />

D. Fire Rating<br />

The smoke pipes should have a fire rating for stability and integrity of not less than 120<br />

minutes as laid down in BS 476: Part 20: 1987. This would prevent the spread of fire from<br />

one compartment to another when fire stopped correctly providing that the structure<br />

through which it passed had a fire rating equal or greater. Copies of fire rating certificate<br />

should be available.<br />

E. Performance<br />

Working Pressure : Zero or negative at appliance outlet<br />

Temperature (Max.) : 540°C constant firing<br />

: 760°C intermittent firing.<br />

Minimum : Inner liner not to be less than 10°C above acid dew<br />

point temperature.<br />

F. Components<br />

1. The smoke pipes shall comprise of a full range of lengths, fittings, terminals and<br />

accessories necessary to provide a complete chimney system.<br />

2. The load bearing and wind load capacity of all components when installed within<br />

a system shall have been determined by the manufacturer using appropriate<br />

structural tests and analysis. Details of the maximum loading for each item shall


e indicted in the installation instructions. The contractor shall submit to the<br />

“Engineer” relevant test reports in support of the above on demand.<br />

3. A complete set of the bolts and nuts necessary for the correct assembly of each<br />

accessory shall be provided with each unit by the manufacturer.<br />

G. Materials<br />

Materials shall be as per the following schedule. Stainless steel shall be used throughout<br />

for the manufacture of all gas carrying components.<br />

1. Lengths and Fittings<br />

Inner Liner - 316 grade<br />

Outer Casing - 304 grade<br />

Locking Bands - 304 grade<br />

Terminals - 316 grade<br />

Accessories - 304 grade<br />

Flashings - Aluminum and zincon<br />

2. Material Thickness<br />

Inner Wall - 1mm<br />

Outer Casing - 0.7mm<br />

Stainless steel as BS 1449 Part 2.<br />

Flashings’ aluminum / zincon<br />

Aluminum as BS 1470: 1987 99% pure<br />

Zincon as BS 6561: 1985<br />

H. Insulation<br />

The annulus between the inner liner and outer casing shall be packed to a constant density<br />

with Mineral wool fiber to give a thermal resistance of not less than 0.3m2 K/W at 200°C<br />

hot face temperature.<br />

Natural rock or blast furnace slag melts spun into fine fibers.<br />

The heat resistance, stability and non-combustibility in accordance with DIN 4102.<br />

Thermal conductivity to be measured in accordance with DIN 52612.<br />

I. Installation<br />

1. A set of installation instructions covering the installation of all components and<br />

accessories shall be provided by the manufacturer. They shall be packed with the<br />

components and accessories so as to be readily available to the installer on site.<br />

The installation of the complete system shall be strictly in accordance with the<br />

manufacturer’s instructions.<br />

2. The manufactures load bearing and lateral support accessories must be used in<br />

every case. Where the accessories require to be extended to suit site conditions an<br />

approved extension bracket shall be supplied and fitted.<br />

3. Adequate access shall be provided through the smoke pipes to enable service<br />

personnel to clean the system without dismantling the chimney.<br />

4. A condensate collector, as provided by the manufacturer, shall be installed<br />

throughout the system as necessary. The collector shall be fitted with a screwed<br />

boss to facilitate the installation of a drain pipe.<br />

5. The smoke pipes shall be fixed to the boiler outlet using a boiler adapter provided<br />

by the chimney manufacture. The adapter to be packed with fiber rope and fire<br />

cement to provide a gas tight seal. If necessary a purpose – made adapter shall be<br />

provided to make the transition from the boiler outlet to the manufacturer’s<br />

adapter<br />

6. A draught regulator shall be provided for each boiler.<br />

7. Rain water cap shall be provided.<br />

J. Packaging<br />

1. Chimney components shall be adequately packaged at the factory to provide<br />

protection during transit or site storage. Large components shall be packed in<br />

cardboard cartons and strapped. Small components shall be vacuum packed in<br />

clear film on cardboard and complete with assembly hardware.


2. The manufacturer’s catalogue number shall be clearly marked on all packages.<br />

5.13 WATER TREATMENT<br />

Refer to section (4) of this specification<br />

5.14 DOSING POT<br />

Refer to section (4) of this specification<br />

5.15 DRAINAGE AND FLUSHING OF SYSTEM<br />

Refer to section (4) of this specification


6 SANITARY FIXTURES<br />

6.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />

The Contractor shall furnish and install all the sanitary fixtures as shown on the Drawings and as<br />

specified below, complete with all their trim and accessories as specified..<br />

Sanitary fixtures shall be of vitreous china to BS 3402, unless otherwise specified and of color as<br />

specified. Fixtures shall have smooth glazed surface free from warp, cracks, flaws, discoloration or<br />

other imperfections. Imperfect fixtures will not be accepted.<br />

Sanitary fixtures shall be supplied complete with all required metal trim and accessories, as<br />

specified, including but not necessarily limited to faucets, wastes, traps, supplies, stop valves, wall<br />

flanges, hangers, plates, brackets, anchors, supports, soap holders, toilet paper holders, etc.<br />

All exposed piping and metal trim for the sanitary fixtures shall be chrome plated brass to BS 5750<br />

Part(1) with polished finish.<br />

All vitreous china accessories shall match the sanitary fixtures and shall be of the same<br />

manufacture and colour.<br />

All sanitary fixtures, trim and accessories shall be the product of a reputable and approved<br />

manufacture and as far as practicable shall be procured from one manufacturer unless specified<br />

otherwise.<br />

Sanitary fixtures and their trim and accessories shall be installed in a neat, finished and uniform<br />

manner as directed by the Engineer. They shall be set straight and true and securely attached to the<br />

supporting surfaces. Roughing shall be accurately laid out to conform with finished walls and<br />

floors.<br />

The colour of sanitary fixtures shall be white for all fixtures unless other wise directed by the<br />

architect.<br />

Sanitary fixtures shall be connected to the drain and water supply pipes in an approved gastight and<br />

watertight manner and as detailed on the Drawings.<br />

Strap or padded wrenches shall be used on chrome plated pipe, fittings, valves and other trim.<br />

Sanitary fixtures, metal trim and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned of labels, plaster, paint<br />

droppings and all foreign matter and shall be well polished and tested for perfect working condition<br />

before turning them over to the Employer.<br />

Concealed brackets, hangers and plates shall be painted as directed by the Engineer.<br />

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a list of all fixtures, trim and accessories that he<br />

proposes to use indicating manufacturer, type and model number, with descriptive catalogues<br />

clearly marked as to the item proposed.<br />

The Contractor shall submit samples of all fixtures, trim and accessories when asked to do so by the<br />

Engineer. Te Contractor shall not charge the Employer with the cost of such samples nor shall he<br />

use any item different from the approved sample.<br />

6.02 W.C. FLOOR MOUNTED<br />

White vitreous china, complete with the following trim and accessories:<br />

- Solid plastic seat without cover, hygienic open fromt design with stainless steel hinge,<br />

rubber washers and plastic screws and nuts.<br />

- 9 liter low level cistern and valve less fitting including syphone, side inlet ball valve,<br />

internal overflow, plastic flush bend, inter connection and reversible chrome plated<br />

cistern lever and cistern support.(internal) Chrome plated angle valve with copper<br />

tube flexible connection and escutcheon.<br />

- W.C. plastic outlet connector.<br />

- W.C. bowel P-trap.<br />

- Toilet paper holder, screw fixed to wall, satin finish.<br />

6.03 SHOWER TRAY<br />

The shower tray shall be made of white vitreous china 800x800 mm. shower tray with antistlipbase<br />

and 150 mm. wall height, complete with the following trim and accessories:<br />

- Chrome plated grid waste fitting 15mm.<br />

- Single lever shower mixer 15mm, wall mounted.<br />

- Bath / shower diverter with non return valve in shower outlet.<br />

- Shower rail, 600mm with wall brackets, sliding piece and swivel holder.


- Hand shower.<br />

- Shower hose 1500mm, chrome plated.<br />

6.04 WASH BASIN<br />

A. Normal Wash Basin<br />

White, vitreous china,560 x 450mm semi-pedestal with overflow and single hole faucet,<br />

complete with the following trim and accessories:<br />

- One hole single mixer.<br />

- Pop-up waste fitting.<br />

- Chrome plated trap 32 mm dia.<br />

- Two angle valves with escutcheon and copper tube flexible connections.<br />

- Soap dish of stainless steel.<br />

- Wall brackets.<br />

6.05 CLEANER SINK<br />

Cleaner Sink shall be made of white enameled fireclay and the overall dimensions shall be 465 x<br />

410 x 285mm. it shall be complete with the following trim and accessories<br />

- Hardwood pad and stainless steel grating.<br />

- Legs and bearers.<br />

- Wall mounted mixer 15mm dia.<br />

- Grid waste fittings 40mm dia.<br />

- Built-in brackets screwed to wall.<br />

- Plastic bottle trap 40mm dia.<br />

-<br />

6.06 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER<br />

Paper towel dispenser dispenses 300 C-fold or 400 multi-fold paper towels, and shall be made of<br />

304 stainless steel satin finish. Rough wall opening 300 mm W x 450 mm. H x 100 mm. D.<br />

6.07 HOOK STRIP<br />

This shall be made of stainless steel, and shall be satin finished. The hook shall be 25mm. W. and<br />

165 mm. H. and projecting 57 mm. from wall. It shall be mouting tip 102 mm. H. 61 cm. Length<br />

with 3 hooks.<br />

6.08 STAINLESS STEEL ANGLE FRAME MIRRORS<br />

Framed mirrors one piece roll formed frame shall be 20 mm. x 20 mm., type 304 stainless steel<br />

angle with satin finish. The frame shall have continuous integral stiffener on all sides for added<br />

strength, and special level design hugs mirror. The corners are heliarc welded, ground and polished<br />

smooth No. 1 quality 6 mm. float/plate glass mirror electrolytically copper plated. It shall be<br />

guaranteed against silver spoilage for 15 years. Mirror edges shall be protected by 3 mm. thick,<br />

waterproof shock absorbing poyethylene padding. 20 gauge galvanized steel back attached to frame<br />

with concealed screws, mirror shall be installed on concealed wall hanger and secured in place by<br />

two stainless steel locking screws.<br />

6.09 SOAP DISH<br />

The one piece soap dish shall be made of stainless steel and shall be welded to support arm and<br />

flange. It shall have drain holes and two rid gest support bar of soap. The dimensions shall be 115<br />

mm. W. x 50 mm. H. projects 86 mm. from wall.<br />

6.10 SHOWER CURTAIN<br />

This shall be vinyle shower curtains, opaque, matte white vinyl 0.2 mm. thick, Nickel plated brass<br />

grommets along top, one every 150 mm. bottom sides hemmed 12 hooks required. Length 1600<br />

mm


7 VENTILATION<br />

7.01 TOILET EXTRACT FANS<br />

Toilet extract fan units shall be of twin centrifugal cabinet type with one fan on duty and the other<br />

fan as stand by. Fan operation shall be controlled by built in controller to alternate operations and to<br />

operate the standby fan, should the on duty fan fails, provided all in accordance with the following<br />

requirements, as scheduled on the Contract Drawings and in the positions shown on the Drawings.<br />

All fans shall be of belt driven motors.<br />

The housing of units shall contain all components of the unit except the terminal box for electrical<br />

connections. The housing shall be provided with dust-protected access covers to IP54 of BS5490 for<br />

inspection, and replacement, of all components. No electrical component shall be fixed to or<br />

supported by any access cover. A galvanised mild steel terminal box shall be securely fixed to the<br />

outside of the casing in a suitable position. Units to be located in plant rooms may be supplied in<br />

chassis form, where specified. Unless otherwise specified the fans shall be arranged for automatic<br />

changeover.<br />

Housing and cowls of externally mounted units shall be weatherproof and manufactured from<br />

galvanised mild steel or aluminium alloy sheets, or glass reinforced plastics to BS 3532, assembled<br />

with compatible and non-corroding nuts, bolts, washers and ancillary items.<br />

Discharge outlets shall be weatherproof and include guard screens to IP20 of BS5490, to prevent<br />

finger contact with electrical and moving parts. Each fan damper shall close when the fan is deenergised.<br />

All items shall have a non-corroding finish.<br />

Except where otherwise specified, dual fans and motors shall be fitted on common base-plates, all<br />

supported on anti-vibration mountings.<br />

Backdraught dampers shall have edge seals and shall open and close fully. All blades shall be<br />

mechanically linked or close by gravity or light springs and be galvanised mild steel except where<br />

specified otherwise.<br />

Fan failure in units of less than 500W fan shaft power shall be sensed and indicated from switches<br />

operated by damper blade movement, except where specified to be otherwise. Double throw airflow<br />

switches shall be used in units above 500W shaft power.<br />

The unit casing shall be manufactured in aluminium alloy of rectangular section and shall house<br />

twin independent removable fan assemblies comprising direct driven double inlet forward curved<br />

centrifugal impellers running in metal scrolls. The discharge outlet shall incorporate back draft<br />

shutter. The fans shall be fitted with air flow sensors and shall discharge into a common outlet<br />

plenum chamber through a linked shutter system. Motors to BS 5000 shall have ventilated<br />

enclosures and sealed for life sleeve bearings. Motors shall be held to scroll frames through resilient<br />

mounts. Motors and flow switches shall be pre wired to an electrical isolator casing accessible from<br />

external to the unit.<br />

A rectangular inlet spigot shall be fitted to the base complete with flexible connector.<br />

The unit casing shall be closed by a top cover, easily removable for access to the fans for servicing<br />

and maintenance purposes. The units shall be acoustically lined and non rusting fasteners shall be<br />

used throughout.<br />

7.02 CENTRIFUGAL TUBULAR FANS<br />

Tubular centrifugal type fan shall be backward curved or airfoil blades design with no over-loading operating<br />

characteristics, and with high efficiency. The fan shall include a flat wheel back plate with cast iron or<br />

fabricated steel hub and accurately formed spun shrouds. The wheel shall be dynamically balanced to<br />

commercial tolerances.<br />

Fans shall be suitable for indirect drive by matched V belts and pulleys, where the system allows<br />

low flow.<br />

Fans shall be selected for slow speed running low sound level and high efficiency. All fans shall be<br />

selected to be capable of being operated by at least 10% in capacity over the design volume<br />

specified<br />

Fans shall be provided with 1 speed 2 speed or 3 speed motors as indicated on the equipment<br />

schedule with Class “F” insulation with protection to IEC 34 5 Group IPW 54 and integral overheat<br />

protection.<br />

Fan casings and scrolls shall be fabricated from heavy gauge mild steel plate adequately stiffened<br />

and supported. Fan casings shall be rigid and completely free from vibration and drumming and<br />

capable of with standing the pressures involved without leakage or distortion. Fan casings shall be<br />

continuously welded construction split as required to pass through available unit access doors.


Fan casings shall be bolted construction for ease of installation, the number of sections being<br />

dependent upon the size of the fan and access available for future removal and replacement.<br />

Bearing blocks shall be carried on opposite sides of the fan casing on bearer bars forming a part of a<br />

rigid fabricated steel structure integral with the casing.<br />

Fans shall be complete with:<br />

a) Backward curved / or airfoil blades<br />

b) Inlet cone<br />

c) All welded fan casings with reinforced outlets<br />

d) Side support frames<br />

e) Polished high grade steel fan shaft on with lubricating roller bearings<br />

f) TEFC electric motor rated for continuous operations in ambient temperature up to 50°C<br />

g) V belt drive<br />

h) Galvanized wire mesh guards constructed and fitted to satisfy all relevant safety legislation<br />

i) Rolled steel channel base frame<br />

j) Anti-vibration mountings<br />

k) Flexible inlet and outlet flexible connections<br />

Laundry Exhaust fans components shall be constructed to operate continuously at not less than<br />

200°C.<br />

All fan sets shall be finished with one priming coat and two coats of gloss. The impeller shall be<br />

finished in a contrasting colour. All fan sets shall be tested at Works and installed strictly in<br />

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.


8 STANDARDS<br />

8.01 INTRODUCTION<br />

This General Specification indicates the minimum standard of Work, workmanship and materials<br />

necessary for the execution of the Contract to the approval of the Engineer and the true intent of this<br />

Specification and associated Drawings.<br />

8.02 DESIGN STANDARDS<br />

The installation shall conform to:<br />

a) The general and specific requirements of the local water authority, public health officer,<br />

local drainage inspectorate and other local statutory authorities.<br />

b) Local authority by laws and other regulations.<br />

c) General and specific requirements of the local fire officer.<br />

d) Relevant codes of practice of the British Standards Institution.<br />

e) The requirements of the insurance companies concerned.<br />

f) National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)<br />

g) American Society for Heating,Refrigeration, and air Conditioning specifications<br />

(ASHRAE).<br />

h) The regulations for the electrical equipment of buildings, (current edition) published by the<br />

Institution of Electrical Engineers, London.<br />

j) The recommendations of the manufacturers of all materials, plant and equipment.<br />

i) Department of health and social security (U.K.), (D.H.S.S.) health building system<br />

engineering nucleus, Volumes 3 and 4C.<br />

m) National Plumbing Code.<br />

n) Guidelines for design and construction of Hospital and health care facilities.<br />

8.03 CONTRACTOR'S PLANT AND TOOLS<br />

The Contractor, unless otherwise specified, shall provide all materials, tackles, slings, scaffolding,<br />

ladders, haulage, labor and apparatus necessary for the supply, delivery and erection of the plant on<br />

site.<br />

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing at his own expense, all the requirements such as<br />

hand tools, hand lamps, and transformers, where necessary, to carry out the works including all<br />

cabling and intermediate connections from supply point to location of work. All wiring, cabling,<br />

etc., serving temporary installations are to be designed, installed and operated, as to be safe and in<br />

full accordance with the appropriate regulations.<br />

As soon as any part of the Contractor's Site establishment or plant is no longer required for carrying<br />

out the Works, the Contractor shall disconnect and remove the same to the satisfaction of the<br />

Engineer.<br />

8.04 PIPEWORK CONNECTIONS<br />

The Contract shall include all pipework and connections to all sanitary fittings, basins and<br />

equipment as detailed on the Drawings and Architectural Loaded Drawings.<br />

8.05 MATERIALS<br />

All materials, plant and equipment shall comply fully with any relevant British Standard<br />

Specification or Code of Practice current at the time of tendering.<br />

The Engineer reserves the right to inspect materials, plant and equipment on Site at reasonable<br />

times and to reject any of the same not complying with the <strong>Specifications</strong>.<br />

The cost of dismantling and re-erection of the installation occasioned by the removal of rejected<br />

materials, plant or equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.<br />

8.06 STANDARDS<br />

Corresponding parts of all apparatus shall be interchangeable and where mechanical or electrical<br />

details are used or which any part of parts are covered by a British Standard Specification, all such


parts are to be made in accordance with such specification as shall be issued at the date at which the<br />

parts have been ordered.<br />

Except where otherwise specified, all bolts, nuts and stud screws thread shall be metric and all pipe<br />

threads to be to B.S. pipe threads standards.<br />

8.07 TRADE CUSTOMS AND PRACTICE<br />

The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for arranging and ensuring that the various classes of<br />

work comply with local trade customs and practice and shall provide accordingly in his Works.<br />

8.08 DIMENSIONS<br />

The Contractor shall take his own dimensions on Site for all plant and material to be supplied by<br />

him and shall be entirely responsible for the accuracy, of his measurements.<br />

8.09 SETTING OUT<br />

The Contractor shall set out the Works in accordance with his installation working drawings.<br />

8.10 NAMEPLATES<br />

All plant and apparatus supplied under this Contract shall be provided with brass nameplates,<br />

bearing the maker's name shop or reference number, size, type, test and working pressure, speed<br />

and other relevant particulars engraved thereon.<br />

8.11 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES<br />

The Contractor shall not, without permission of the Engineer, interrupt or interfere with the<br />

operation of existing services such as water, electric lighting and power, buried cables, sewers,<br />

drains, etc., nor, in the case of works of statutory authorities or private owners, without the<br />

permission of these authorities or owners.<br />

In the event of any such damage, the Contractor shall be responsible for the making good of same<br />

to the satisfaction of the Engineer, authorities or owners, as the case may be.<br />

8.12 MISUSE OF MATERIALS<br />

No materials brought on to Site for incorporation in the Works shall be used for scaffolding or any<br />

other temporary purpose.<br />

8.13 VOUCHERS<br />

The Contractor, at the request of the Engineer, must produce invoices, paid or unpaid, or accounts if<br />

required as proof that the goods are in all respect as herein specified.<br />

8.14 OBSTRUCTIONS<br />

No extra charge shall be made for moving or circumventing any obstruction or other Contractor's<br />

equipment that may be laid on the Site and the Contractor must, therefore, allow in his tender for<br />

these and any other contingencies likely to arise.<br />

8.15 INSPECTION, TESTING AND REJECTION<br />

The Engineer shall be entitled during manufacture to inspect, examine and test the materials and<br />

workmanship for all plant to be supplied under the Contract, whether at the Contractor's or<br />

manufacturer's premises or on the Site. Such inspection, examination or testing shall not release the<br />

Contractor from any obligation under the Contract. The whole of the installation shall be tested on<br />

completion (in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer or his representative) in the<br />

relevant Sections of this Specification as applied to the particular installation concerned.<br />

Certificates of test, in duplicate, must be furnished by the Contractor to the Engineer, for all plant or<br />

materials specified to be tested at maker's works.<br />

The tests on Site specified hereinafter are to be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or his<br />

Representative. The accuracy of all tests is to be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, whose decision<br />

shall be final.<br />

The Contractor shall provide free of charge on the Site at his own expense and/or the<br />

manufacturer's works, such labor, materials, apparatus and instruments as the Engineer may<br />

consider requisite from time to time and as may reasonably be demanded to efficiently test the<br />

plant, materials or works as far as completed, until the plant is accepted as a whole by the Engineer.<br />

The Contractor shall at all times give facilities to the Engineer or his authorized representative to<br />

accomplish such testing.


The Contractor shall demonstrate, if required, the accuracy of any instrument used for testing.<br />

At least seven days' notice must be given by the Contractor of any test carried out on the Site to<br />

enable the Engineer or his authorized representative to be present if they so desire.<br />

Testing of pipes and other apparatus as specified under the various Sections of <strong>Specifications</strong> may<br />

be required to be carried out in parts against testing as a whole and the Contractor must provide<br />

accordingly in his tender.<br />

Should the Works on testing not conform to the <strong>Specifications</strong>, the Contractors must make them so<br />

conform at his own expense and, if he fails to do so within a reasonable period, not exceeding<br />

fourteen days, the Engineer shall be at liberty to call upon him to remove the defective part and<br />

reinstate without cost to the Employer.<br />

8.16 INSPECTION BEFORE CONCEALMENT<br />

Whenever work subsequently to be concealed, requires inspection or testing due notice of at least<br />

seven days shall be given to the Engineer so that inspection may be made or tests witnessed before<br />

concealment.<br />

Failure to give due notice may necessitate the Contractor uncover the work and re install it at his<br />

own expense.<br />

8.17 VALVE LABELS<br />

The Contractor shall supply and fix on all valves and stop cocks throughout the system, white<br />

ivorine labels with black engraved lettering to provide a clear indication of the precise function of<br />

the valve. Each label shall be numbered to agree with the Schedule of Valves and the 'As Fitted'<br />

drawings.<br />

8.18 THERMAL INSULATION - GENERAL<br />

All items of thermal insulation work covered by this Specification shall be carried out by an<br />

approved specialist thermal insulation contractor. Only skilled operatives in this field of work shall<br />

be employed. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included for all works specified to be carried<br />

out by the aforementioned specialist.<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that he is acquainted with all of the Conditions of the Works,<br />

specifications, hours of working, completion date(s), etc., at tender stage and he shall complete all<br />

Works within the program specified. The thermal insulation work shall not be commenced, unless<br />

otherwise approved in writing, until the whole or part of the installation has been completed and<br />

tested as set out in the relevant pipework, plant and air distribution Sections of the <strong>Specifications</strong>.<br />

All thermal insulation shall be as detailed hereafter, unless specifically detailed otherwise under the<br />

relevant Clause of the <strong>Technical</strong> <strong>Specifications</strong>.<br />

Thermal insulation shall conform with all relevant parts of the building regulations, and to BS<br />

5422-5970.<br />

Insulation materials shall comply with BS 3927 & BS 3958. Thermal insulation of the buried pipes<br />

services shall comply with BS 4508.<br />

8.19 THERMAL INSULATION IN VOIDS SHAFTS AND DUCTS<br />

Where pipes and ducts are installed in buildings voids, shafts and ducts and in any position<br />

otherwise indicated on the tender drawings, they shall be insulated as follows:<br />

a) Pipework:<br />

All pipework, carrying fluids as specified under item 2.19 shall be individually insulated<br />

with performed glass fibre sections with white lacquered aluminum foil Kraft laminate<br />

covering secured with an approved adhesive and circumferential joints sealed with tape, all<br />

to conform with Class '0' spread of flame.<br />

Alternatively chilled water pipework shall be individually insulated with Class '0' foil<br />

backed rigid Nilflam sections with all longitudinal and circumferential joints secured with<br />

an approved adhesive and then sealed with Class '0' aluminum tape to provide a<br />

continuous vapor seal.<br />

Aluminum bands shall be applied to all insulation at approx. 300 mm. centres.<br />

Where bends and offsets occur, the insulation shall be tailored to suit.<br />

The thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with the Appendix at the end of this<br />

Section of the <strong>Specifications</strong>.<br />

Polished aluminum and cappings shall be provided to close all insulation terminations.<br />

b) Pipework Fittings:


All valves, flanges, unions and all other items requiring access for maintenance shall be<br />

insulated as follows:<br />

1) Chilled Water Fittings: Insulated in accordance with (a) above with mitered<br />

removable sections to provide a continuous vapor barrier.<br />

2) H.W. Steam and Condensate Fittings on Pipework 40mm diameter and above:<br />

Insulated with removable casings as detailed under Plant Rooms and adjoining<br />

insulation fitted with aluminum end caps.<br />

3) All Other Fittings: Adjoining pipe insulation to be fitted with aluminum<br />

end caps.<br />

8.20 THERMAL INSULATION EXTERNALLY<br />

Where pipes and ducts are installed externally on roof top plant rooms or in external underground<br />

trenches or in other wet areas internally, (i.e. showers, bath areas, etc.) and in any other positions<br />

otherwise shown on the tender drawings, they shall be insulated as follows:<br />

a) Pipework:<br />

All pipework, carrying hot or cold water and steam and chilled water, shall be individually<br />

insulated with plain performed glass fibre sections.<br />

Chilled water pipework shall be individually insulated with rigid fiberglass rigid<br />

performed sections or with Nilflam sections with all longitudinal and circumferential joints<br />

secured with an approved adhesive.<br />

Self-adhesive tape bands shall be applied to all insulation at approx. 300 mm. centers.<br />

Where bends and offsets occur, insulation shall be tailored to suit.<br />

The thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with the Appendix at the end of this<br />

Section of the <strong>Specifications</strong>.<br />

All insulated pipework shall then be covered with 0.8mm thick Polyiso-butylene (PlB)<br />

sheeting with 50 mm. overlaps on all circumferential and longitudinal joints. And shall be<br />

finally cladded with 0.8mm stucco embossed aluminum cladding.<br />

b) Pipework Fittings:<br />

All valves, flanges, unions, etc., on all pipework carrying hot or cold water and steam shall<br />

be insulated as detailed in (a) above.<br />

8.21 THERMAL INSULATION OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT<br />

a) Boiler Flues:<br />

All flues from oil and solid fuel fired boilers, boilers fired by forced draught gas burners<br />

and flue ducting serving multi-boiler installation, shall be insulated with a 50mm thick foil<br />

faced rigid section glass fiber Lamella slabs, secured with tie wires formed of three-turns<br />

of 1mm diameter wire spaced at 450mm centers.<br />

The insulation shall then be covered by 0.8 mm. thick stucco embossed aluminum<br />

sheeting, securely riveted. Where flanges and spigots occur, the insulation shall be<br />

terminated at each side of the flange with a neat return edge and the aluminum finish<br />

butting up to the flange. The flange to be then covered with a removable casing, as detailed<br />

under Boiler house and Plant Rooms.<br />

The whole of the insulation shall be arranged to accommodate the movement of expansion<br />

and contraction.<br />

Removable clean out doors shall be provided in all horizontal sections of flues at no<br />

greater than 5m centers. All clean-out doors shall be of double skin construction, having<br />

50mm integral insulation and be attached by adjustable quick release fasteners.<br />

Door sealing shall be by means of securely attached noncombustible rope.<br />

c) Internal Cold Water Storage Tanks:<br />

All surfaces of internal tanks shall be insulated with 40 mm. thick foil faced rigid<br />

isocyanurate foam panels secured by suitable adhesive.<br />

All joints shall be sealed with a 100 mm. wide tape to provide a continuous vapor barrier.<br />

All corners shall be strengthened with rigid aluminum angles and the tank shall be clad<br />

with 0.6 mm. stuccoembossed aluminum sheeting, securely riveted and fixed with a<br />

suitable adhesive.<br />

On externally flanged sectional tanks, the insulation shall be secured to the aluminum<br />

sheet by suitable adhesive.


The composite panels shall then be fixed by means of suitable aluminum angle and T<br />

sections, all securely fixed to present a rigid finish. The panels shall be arranged so as to<br />

be demountable for flange access.<br />

d) External Cold Water Storage Tanks (if required in BOQ):<br />

External water storage tanks shall be insulated with 50mm thick rigid isocyanurate foam<br />

slabs, secured with an approved adhesive, reinforced with 25 mm. mesh galvanized wire<br />

netting and coated with two coats of fibre-filled bitumen emulsion trowelled smooth and<br />

even, having scrim cloth or hessian embedded in the final coat.<br />

8.22 THERMAL INSULATION PROTECTION<br />

Any pipework or ductwork, which is insulated but which is likely to be accidentally damaged<br />

during maintenance or in gaining access to an area of void or at low level ( constrained at 2 meter<br />

high from FFL) of plant rooms, shafts (Open in Tunnel) Tunnel and Roofs etc., shall be additionally<br />

protected with 0.8 mm. thick stucco embossed aluminum sheeting. Any damage within the contract<br />

period, which may occur as a result of non-compliance with the requirements, shall be made good<br />

at no cost to the Employer.<br />

8.23 PAINTING IN PLANT ROOM<br />

a) All un-insulated pipework, ductwork, flanges, unions, valves, trench covers and handrails<br />

shall be treated as Method 5.<br />

b) All steel pipework to be insulated shall be treated as Method 1.<br />

c) All boiler flues, grit arrestors, chimney flues and other surfaces designed to operate at<br />

temperatures in excess of 200 °C shall be treated as Method 4.<br />

d) All support detailed in Clause 2.56 to be galvanized shall be treated as Method 2.<br />

e) Supporting steelwork for hoppers, gantries, hotwells, silos, tanks and all other structural<br />

steelwork shall be treated as Method 3.<br />

f) All black steel hot wells, hoppers, silos, tanks and other fabricated mild steel equipment<br />

not detailed elsewhere shall be treated as Method 3 unless stated otherwise elsewhere in<br />

the <strong>Specifications</strong>.<br />

g) All insulated ductwork shall be treated as Method 6.<br />

h) All equipment and plant delivered to site in a pre-finished condition shall have all damage<br />

made good prior to handover.<br />

8.24 PAINTING IN VOIDS, SHAFTS AND DUCTS<br />

a) All un-insulated pipework shall be treated as Method 5.<br />

b) All steel pipework to be insulated shall be treated as Method l.<br />

8.25 PAINTING EXTERNALLY<br />

Painting externally shall be in accordance with that detailed for Plant Rooms with the following<br />

exceptions.<br />

a) Where supports are installed in concealed positions, i.e. underground trenches and tunnels<br />

trenches etc., they shall be hot dip galvanized only.<br />

b) Insulated ductwork shall be treated as detailed under 'insulation'<br />

.<br />

rendering selection)<br />

8.26 PROTECTIVE PAINTING<br />

Provide a heavy field coat of black asphalt paint on all steel pipe, cradles, vibration isolating<br />

mounts, and the like, that will be encased or partially encased in building construction, set in<br />

cement or fill, before items are built into the general construction. Kitchen range hood ducts and<br />

boiler breeching shall be painted with heat resistant paint.<br />

Coat interior of each outdoor air chamber with two coats of odorless, rust resisting, non-scaling<br />

paint.<br />

Interior of ducts at register boxes should be painted by applying two coats of black paint to a dull<br />

finish.<br />

All pumps, motors, fans and all other factory manufactured and assembled apparatus shall be<br />

factory coated with one coat of primer and one coat of machinery enamel, and after installation<br />

shall be cleaned and touched up to repair any damage incurred during construction.<br />

IDENTIFICATION OF SYSTEMS


Provide three sets of charts or diagrams, on cloth, showing outline plans of structures and essential<br />

features of the several systems, including all piping, ducts, equipment, valves, dampers and<br />

controls.<br />

All valves, dampers, and controls shall be designated by distinguishing numbers on the charts or<br />

diagrams. provide stamped brass tags for all designated items with numbers corresponding to those<br />

on the charts. The nomenclature to be used on these tags shall be submitted for approval<br />

The tags shall be not be less than 50mm (2in) in diameter with depressed black numbers of 15mm<br />

(1/2 in) height, prefixed by the letters "HVAC". They shall be fastened to valves and controls with<br />

approved brass chains and hooks.<br />

Piping identification shall be in conformance with the following:-<br />

- Provide and affix approved adhesive bands identifying the service, by stem and zone, and<br />

direction of flow to the various piping systems. Such bands shall be provided in all<br />

occupied and unoccupied rooms as well as in all the other spaces (such as shafts) in which<br />

piping may be viewed. A set of such bands shall be affixed to each pipe not less frequently<br />

than every forty feet and there shall be at least one set of identifying bands per pipe in each<br />

space requiring identifying bands. Identifying bands shall also be provided adjacent to<br />

each valve. Valves at equipment and pumps do not require separate identification.<br />

- Each set shall consist of one and on which the name of the service is printed in black<br />

letters not less than 50mm (2in) high for pipe 65mm (2/1/2in) and smaller and one band on<br />

which is printed a black directional arrow. Bands shall be pplied where they can be easily<br />

read and with their one dimension parallel to the axis of the pipe. Bands shall have<br />

backgrounds of different colors for the various service groups as follows:-<br />

8.27 THERMAL INSULATION IDENTIFICATION<br />

All insulation and exposed pipework installed throughout the Project shall be identified by color<br />

code/safety indication and basic color identification bands as B.5.1710.<br />

The safety color and color code, indication bands shall be 100 mm. wide, between two basic color<br />

identification bands, each of a length of 150 mm, generally as shown on the Appendix II of this<br />

Section of the <strong>Specifications</strong>. The identification shall be at centers of not more than 3 meters and<br />

adjacent to all valves, items of plant, changes in direction and point where the pipework passes<br />

through walls, floors, etc.<br />

Pipe contents and designation (i.e. HW, Chilled Water Flow, South Side), pipe sizes, flow and<br />

return designation and direction flow arrows in black, shall be applied to the basic color<br />

identification band as detailed in appendix 'E' of B.5.1710.<br />

Colors for color code/safety indication and basic color identification shall be as detailed in<br />

Appendix 'D' of B.S.1710, the main service being shown in Appendix II of this Section of the<br />

<strong>Specifications</strong>.<br />

8.28 INSTALLATION OF PIPED SERVICES<br />

Installation of all pipework shall follow the detail set out in the accompanying drawings and be in<br />

accordance with the best accepted practice.<br />

Details set out in the following Clauses of this Section are generally appropriate to all services<br />

except where specifically stated elsewhere in the <strong>Specifications</strong> and Drawings.<br />

All exposed pipe runs shall be arranged to present a neat appearance and, where practical be<br />

parallel both with one another and with the building structure, taking due regard however to the<br />

grading, venting and draining requirements. All vertical pipes shall be plumb.<br />

All exposed pipe runs shall be arranged so that the longest length of tube practicable is used<br />

between bends, tees and flanges or unions. Short lengths of tube joined together by sockets shall not<br />

be permitted.<br />

All pipework, valves, fittings and equipment forming the piping installations shall be erected so that<br />

it can be dismantled and is accessible for repair and replacement. In this context, 'accessible' means<br />

that the provision for dismantling the flange, union, etc. can be reached and worked upon either in<br />

the open or else by removal of a purpose-made duct cover, manhole or similar cover; the fitting is<br />

"not accessible" if, as fixed, it cannot be manipulated.<br />

Where pipework is not readily accessible, it shall be welded. Unions or flanges shall be provided at<br />

valves and equipment so that they can be dismantled. No pipe shall be installed without a flange or<br />

union at a point where it passes through a wall, floor or ceiling and is not readily removable.<br />

No joints shall be formed within the thickness of walls, floors or ceilings.<br />

Unions or flanges shall be provided generally at a maximum spacing of one per 18 meters in<br />

position agreed by the Engineer.


To facilitate routine maintenance, the position of all valves, drains and supports shall be determined<br />

with this aspect in mind. Grouping of valves, drains, unions, flanges, etc. shall be preferred to<br />

scattered sitting.<br />

Clearance between pipework and finished walls, floors, ceiling and other fixtures should be<br />

adequate for cleaning purposes and future dismantling, and shall not be less than the distance given<br />

below:<br />

Pipe to floor distance-minimum 100mm:<br />

Pipe to ceiling distance- minimum 100mm:<br />

Pipe to wall distance-minimum to conform to standard bracket centers:<br />

Pipe to pipe distance-minimum 32mm:<br />

The Contractor shall include for bends in pipes round piers and all other projections and recesses<br />

and for all offsets due to varying thickness of plaster, walls, floors, ceilings, and other structural<br />

works. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain the skirting heights, sill heights<br />

and floor finishes. No pipework offsets shall be allowed on pipework visible in rooms, except as<br />

agreed with the Engineer.<br />

Where pipe is held by vice, as when threading or cutting, care shall be taken to ensure that the pipe<br />

surface is not damaged. Any pipe so damaged shall not be fitted. Equally applicable, any pipe with<br />

surface damage by scoring whilst being installed shall be removed and rejected.<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes, fittings, valves, etc. are free from corrosion and internal<br />

obstruction. Pipes and fittings showing signs of corrosion shall not be fitted.<br />

The Contractor shall protect the open ends of all pipework. Suitable caps, plugs or plastic covers<br />

only shall be used to cover open ends. Wood, rag or paper plugs shall not be used.<br />

The Contractor shall not use a valve fitted to the open ends of a disconnected pipe to prevent the<br />

entry of dirt.<br />

Failure to comply with the above instructions shall mean that the Engineer shall have the right to<br />

order the pipework to be dismantled for as far as considered necessary and the pipework to be<br />

thoroughly cleaned internally.<br />

The Contractor shall carry out this work free of cost to the Employer and shall bear all costs<br />

incurred by removing, cleaning and replacing the sections of pipework.<br />

Chilled water pipework shall be erected to neatly follow the lines of walls, floors, tunnels and<br />

trenches and be correctly graded to ensure venting and draining down can be achieved. Air vents<br />

equipped with valves and installed on pipe lines shall be situated at all high points. The clearance<br />

between pipework (or if lagged, the lagging) and walls, floors or any other fixtures shall be not less<br />

than 100 mm. Pipe drops shall be vertically plum. All horizontal and vertical adjacent pipework<br />

shall be installed parallel to walls and floors except where gradients for venting and draining dictate<br />

otherwise.<br />

Headers, where indicated shall be arranged so that each circuit isolating valve is connected direct to<br />

a vertical outlet on the top of the header. Circuit connections such as thermometers, flushing valves<br />

and circuit isolating valves shall be arranged at common horizontal levels.<br />

Distribution headers up to and including 50 mm. installed on closed circuit recirculation systems<br />

shall have the ends terminated with a screwed cap or plug.<br />

Distribution headers above 50 mm. on closed circuits and on open circuits shall have the ends<br />

terminated with a flange welded onto the pipe, and a blank flange bolted to it.<br />

Curved or long sweep bends and branches shall be provided as far as is practicable. Square elbows<br />

will not be permitted.<br />

Wherever practicable, made bend and sets shall be furnished in preference to short radius fittings.<br />

Bends and sets in black pipework above 50 mm. diameter shall be hot formed having a radius not<br />

less than four times the pipe diameter. The tubes must remain circular after setting.<br />

Long sweep branches with gradual reductions shall be used for reduced diameters where two mains<br />

connect together.<br />

Exceptions to the above shall be used where air pipes or air bottles, drain or dirt pockets, are taken<br />

off or air venting requirements dictate, in which case square connections and fittings may be used.<br />

Special care shall be taken where branch joints, welded joints, basses, vents and drain pockets are made, to<br />

ensure that there is no obstruction or possible cause of obstruction and to see that full bore is<br />

maintained in all directions.<br />

1- All branch connections shall be taken from top, side or at a 45° angle from all horizontal<br />

piping. Bottom connection shall not be allowed without special flushing provisions being


made. When taking side connections from horizontal mains adequate facilities for draining<br />

shall be provided.<br />

2- The distance between any two adjacent branches shall not less than the sum of the outside<br />

diameters of the branches.<br />

Where pipework is routed within false ceilings or sealed service ducts or other encasement where<br />

access is difficult, all pipework shall be welded.<br />

Reduction in sizes of pipe lines shall be made by either of the following approved methods:<br />

1- By factory made reducing pieces manufactured at the tube or fitting manufacturer's works.<br />

2- By properly hot swaging down the larger pipe to the smaller diameter while ensuring that<br />

the internal diameter of the reduced pipe is not less than the smaller pipe diameter.<br />

Reductions on horizontal pipe shall be eccentric reduction on vertical pipes shall be concentric.<br />

8.29 PIPEWORK MATERIALS<br />

All pipework installed by the Contractor shall conform with the specified materials, specified under<br />

Appendix IV “schedule of pipeline”.<br />

8.30 MILD STEEL PIPEWORK<br />

Where the table of pipework materials requires the use of mild steel pipework, this shall be straight,<br />

cleanly finished, round in cross section, free from cracks, surface flaws, lamination and other<br />

defects and shall be free from rust and scale.<br />

Standard steel pipes having nominal bores of up to 150 mm. shall be in accordance with<br />

B.S.1387:1967 and shall be provided in random lengths of between 4.5 m. and 7.5 m. Gauge of<br />

pipe walls shall be in accordance with the heavy grades of the Standard.<br />

Steel pipework over 150 mm. bore shall be of mild steel manufacture in accordance with<br />

B.S.3600:1976. The wall thickness shall be suitable for the pressures of the system in which it is to<br />

be installed, and shall be not less than following thickness:<br />

Size of Pipe Thickness (inches) (inches)/mm.<br />

200mm 0.322 8. 00<br />

250mm 0.365 8. 80<br />

300mm 0.375 10.0<br />

350mm 0.375 10.0<br />

Steel pipework for welding shall be supplied with plain ends, beveled for butt welding.<br />

Where pipes are required for screwed joints, they shall be provided with screwed taper<br />

Steel pipes, which are to be used 'black', shall be varnished externally throughout their length after<br />

manufacturer.<br />

Galvanized steel tubes shall be to B.S.1387, heavy grade<br />

Where steel pipes are to be installed underground, they shall be double wrapped in special tape<br />

suitable for the application.<br />

8.31 COPPER PIPEWORK<br />

Where the table of pipework materials requires the use of copper pipes, they shall be of the type<br />

solid drawn from phosphorous deoxidized non-arsencial copper to B.S. 6017 free from any<br />

deleterious film. Copper pipes used above ground shall be half hard-light gauge in accordance with<br />

B.S.2871, Part 1, table X.<br />

Copper Pipework used below ground shall be half hard annealed- heavy gauge in accordance with<br />

B.S.2871, Part 1, Table 'Y' to be plastic coated.<br />

All piping and tubing used in the installation described in this Specification shall be straight,<br />

cleanly finished, round in cross section, free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and other<br />

defects.<br />

8.32 WELDED JOINTS<br />

Steel pipes, having welded joints on the run, shall be prepared for jointing in a manner suitable for<br />

the technique employed. Welding shall be carried out in accordance with R.S.2971 for metal arc<br />

welded joints, using covered electrodes and B.S.1821:1957 and B.S.2640:1955 for oxy-acetylene<br />

welded joints.<br />

Pipes shall be prepared for welding with ends swan or cut off by hand, flame cut by hand with<br />

subsequent truing up by filing or by grinding to a bevel of 37. 5" as may be required. Welding rods


shall in all cases be of good quality copper coated low carbon steel and the manufacturer shall<br />

provide test certificates representative of the rods in accordance with B.S.1453: 1972, Group A.<br />

All pipework shall be reamed after cutting to ensure it is free from rust, burns, scale and other<br />

defects and shall be thoroughly cleaned before erection.<br />

All welded joints, produced by the oxy-acetylene flame process, shall be of best quality, the butt<br />

being slightly convex with regular ripples and no undercutting, washing away or surface cavities<br />

being resent. Notches at the root indicating incomplete penetration and excessive weld protruding<br />

into the pipe bore in excess of 1.5 mm. shall not occur and the external reinforcement shall run out<br />

smoothly to the pipe surface on either side.<br />

Welding shall in all cases be carried out by skilled craftsmen, who are in possession of a current<br />

certificate of competency issued by an approved authority (which shall be produced at the request<br />

of the Engineer and have had a suitable period of experience for the class of work in which they are<br />

engaged in accordance with B.5.4871 and B.S.4870.<br />

Highly skilled non-certificated welders may only be used by written permission of the Engineer and<br />

test welds, in accordance with R.S.4870, Part l, 1972 with satisfactory laboratory test certificates,<br />

shall be submitted before this permission is granted. The Engineer shall determine a suitable<br />

independent testing authority and any costs arising from these tests shall be borne by the<br />

Contractor.<br />

During all welding or cutting operations, the welder shall be accompanied by a competent assistant<br />

and suitable asbestos mats shall be used to protect the building fabric and decorations.<br />

Every precaution shall be taken to prevent damage by scorching or fire and the Contractor shall<br />

provide the welder with two portable fire extinguishers for use in an emergency.<br />

After cutting or welding, all flashings shall be removed from all pipework before erection.<br />

All welded joints shall be painted two coats of red oxide on completion of the joint.<br />

Flanges shall incorporate bolt holes, drilled not punched. Flange faces shall be machined fully<br />

across. When the joints are made, the bolt shall project 3 mm. minimum beyond the nut.<br />

8.33 FITTINGS FOR GALVANIZED MILD STEEL PIPEWORK<br />

Fittings for all galvanized mild steel pipework up to and including 50 mm. dia. shall be malleable<br />

cast iron pipe fittings to B.S.143, manufactured by the Whiteheart process to Grade 1 of B.S. 309<br />

banded or beaded for reinforcement with the exception of steam pipework on which wrought steel<br />

pipe fittings, manufactured from mild steel by seamless or welded process to B.S.1740 shall be<br />

used.<br />

Fittings on galvanized pipework shall be galvanized to B.S.729, Part 1.<br />

The screwed ends of the fittings shall be provided with parallel female and tapered male threads to<br />

B.S.21, Part 1, the axis of thread being coincident with the true axis of the fittings. Where required,<br />

taper threaded fittings shall be provided and shall be in accordance with B.S.143.<br />

Fittings on black mild steel pipework of 42 mm. dia. and above shall be welding fittings heavy<br />

weight to B.S.1965 and be manufactured by a forged seamless process from mild steel.<br />

In addition to the fittings set out in the standards, branch bends manufactured to the same details<br />

may be used.<br />

Ends of fittings, which shall have the same wall thickness as that of tube manufactured to the<br />

'heavy' grade of B.S. 1387, shall be beveled for butt welding.<br />

Generally all fittings shall, where practicable, be of the easy sweep type. Branches shall be made<br />

using swept tees or branch bends except where an air lock is liable to form i.e. tees on rising mains,<br />

etc., where square tees shall be used.<br />

Elbows shall be used only where the use of bends is impracticable and where the Engineer's<br />

permission has been obtained.<br />

Where standard fittings are not available for the duty required, reductions on the run and to the<br />

branch shall, in all cases, be made with reducing sockets not bushes.<br />

Reducing fittings on horizontal pipework shall be of the eccentric pattern fixed so as to give a<br />

smooth run to the crown of the pipe. Concentric pattern reducers shall be used on vertical pipework.<br />

If bends and springs are manufactured on site, then cold bending by a hydraulically operated<br />

machine shall be permitted for standard steel pipes having a bore of 50 mm. or less, but larger pipes<br />

shall be bent hot. All bends shall he normalized by heat treatment after manipulation.<br />

The diameter shall be maintained; crinkled and scored work will not be accepted.<br />

Where junctions to steel mains are formed by factory or site welding, such work shall be carried out<br />

to the above standards for steel tubular. All necessary reinforcement by way of plates, collars or<br />

shoes shall be provided. All branch bends, where possible, shall be formed by the use of special


welding fittings of the same quality as the pipe and shall conform to B.S.1965:1963 and<br />

amendments.<br />

Where branch bends are used, the profile of the hole shall be carefully set out to match the fitting<br />

and where the holes are flame-cut all loose scale and oxide shall be removed from the main before<br />

the branch is welded into position.<br />

The distance between the centers of two adjacent branch welds shall not be less than twice the<br />

diameter of the large branch. All changes in direction shall be proportioned so that the ratio<br />

between the centre line radius of the bend and the inside diameter of the pipe is not less than 1.5: 1.<br />

Lobster back and cut and shut bends will not be permitted.<br />

Unions shall, in all instances, be manufactured with double gunmetal seats as the Navy pattern.<br />

8.34 PIPEWORK SUPPORTS<br />

All pipework shall be adequately supported on galvanized steel hangers or on brackets with rollers<br />

in order to permit free movement due to expansion and contraction.<br />

Pipework support shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes in direction.<br />

The Contractor shall include for the supply of all necessary supports and brackets complete with all<br />

bolts, screws and inserts or plug fastenings.<br />

Particular importance must be attached to the design and method of supports and brackets for<br />

pipework and equipment. Care should be exercised regarding strength of material, construction,<br />

method of fixing, practicability and appearance when designing brackets. Drawings of all brackets<br />

and supports shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval before manufacture is commenced.<br />

Details of all patent fixing to the building fabric shall also be submitted to the Engineer for prior<br />

approval.<br />

Softwood plugs will not be permitted.<br />

Vertical pipework shall be adequately supported at the base of the riser and at all intermediate<br />

levels. Branch circuit pipes shall not be used as a means of support for the riser main.<br />

Brackets and support shall be set out so that they do not obstruct the access to valve flanges or<br />

fittings requiring maintenance.<br />

Pipes shall be spaced in relation to one another and to the building structure so as not to interfere<br />

with any other service and to allow for the required thickness of thermal insulation as specified<br />

later.<br />

Pipes shall not be supported from each other, but, where there is no alternative, the Engineer's<br />

written approval must be obtained. The brackets so installed shall not prevent the removal of any<br />

individual pipe where necessary and provision shall be made for any unequal expansion.<br />

Pipes shall not be supported from any item of equipment.<br />

All high level pipework is to be carried on neat galvanized swivel hangers with GM split rings or<br />

steel glands suitably spaced to prevent sagging and to allow expansion and contraction.<br />

Brackets, hangers and supports shall be of hot dipped galvanized after manufacture steel sections<br />

and are to be as follows:<br />

a) Brackets:<br />

1) Brackets to walls:-<br />

Flat iron with fish tail end (minimum size 40mm x 6 mm):<br />

2) Brackets to walls:-<br />

Angle iron with fish end (minimum size 32 mm x 32 mm x 6 mm):<br />

3) Brackets to R.C. Beams:-<br />

Rag bolt with eye built in (minimum size 15mm diameter):<br />

4) Brackets to R.S.J.:<br />

Girder clips.<br />

5) Brackets suspended from flat roofs:<br />

Rod with eye on underside (minimum size 9mm diameter), and with back-plate<br />

and lockout on top side:<br />

6) Brackets in trenches and tunnel:<br />

Channel iron, minimum size 100 mm. x 50 mm. x 6mm.<br />

b) Hangers:<br />

1) Rods (minimum size 9mm dia) with purpose-made hook and/or eye.<br />

2) Tubes (minimum bore 6 mm.) with chandelier hooks or, ring sockets.<br />

c) Supports:


1) Purpose-made mild steel band (minimum size 25 mm. x 3 mm. strap) with nut<br />

and bolt or malleable iron split ring with socket for all mild steel pipework.<br />

2) Purpose-made heavy gauge brass strip with nut and bolt or gunmetal split ring<br />

with socket for all copper pipework.<br />

3) Purpose-made mild steel stirrup (minimum size 32 mm. x 3 mm.) with roller and<br />

chair sized to manufacturer's recommendation for steel and copper pipework<br />

where required to allow for expansion. Bronze rollers shall be used for copper<br />

pipework.<br />

Any combination of the above will be allowed, providing that uniformity to type is<br />

adopted throughout the various sections of the building.<br />

All hangers and supports, except at necessary fixed points, must be allowed to swing freely<br />

to make up expansion and contraction. All low level pipework to be supported by<br />

munzening ring and the tube secured into walls by brass anchor fixings.<br />

All brackets, hangers and supports, except supports for copper pipework, are to be hot dip<br />

galvanized after manufacture to B.S.729.<br />

The spacing distance between brackets and support to be as per Appendix No III at end of<br />

Section 2.00<br />

All sizes of copper piping 2.0 m. apart.<br />

In addition to the centers given, support shall be provided adjacent all valves, flanged<br />

joints and other special components to prevent undue strain on the adjoining pipework and<br />

so that the equipment or sections of pipework may be removed, leaving the adjoining<br />

pipework adequately supported at the ends.<br />

Main walls and partition walls etc. where pipes pass through sleeves, shall not be<br />

considered as pipe supports.<br />

8.35 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF PIPEWORK<br />

Expansion and Contraction of Pipework, expansion joints, guides, and anchor points, as required,<br />

whether or not shown on the drawing shall be installed to resist the maximum stresses of the<br />

pipework, formed by the Contractor .<br />

a) Expansion Loops and Bends<br />

All pipework shall be installed to accommodate without distortion the linear expansion<br />

when heated. Pipe supports shall be of the type, which will allow full movements of the<br />

pipes except at fixed points which shall be provided as necessary between expansion<br />

bends, or sets. The fixed points shall be secured by anchors of an approved design.<br />

The Contractor shall, provide and fix all the requisite expansion loops formed in the pipe<br />

runs by means of long radius welded sweep elbows to the required dimensions. The loops<br />

shall be installed in the mains with mild steel flanges and each leg of the loop shall be<br />

pulled cold to approximately 50% of the estimated expansion of the leg.<br />

Where no bellows or loops are specified, provision for expansion and contraction of<br />

pipework shall be made by changes in direction and it shall be the responsibility of the<br />

Contractor to make sufficient allowance for this.<br />

Branch connections are to be taken from the top or bottom of both flow and return mains,<br />

depending on the prevailing air venting arrangements. Branches shall have incorporated in<br />

them two bends before passing into ducts, trenches, vertical chases, etc. The bends shall be<br />

arranged so as to take up the expansion and contraction of the mains without putting any<br />

extraneous strain onto the particular branches.<br />

The Contractor shall install piping in a manner so as to permit perfect freedom of its<br />

movement during expansion and contraction operations without causing it to become<br />

warped. The strain and weight of the piping must not be transmitted to the connected<br />

apparatus.<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that adequate provision is made for the expansion and<br />

contraction of all pipelines.<br />

Where expansion fittings become necessary they must be anchored and guided in<br />

accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and/or these <strong>Specifications</strong>.<br />

The Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed fittings for approval, together with<br />

all calculations and details of loading imposed on the structures.<br />

Where branch connections are made to mains remote from anchor points on the latter, the<br />

take off shall be so arranged as to form a radius arm whereby the axial movement of the<br />

main is allowed to take place without imposing a bending stress upon the branch.


With a view to reducing strain due to expansion on plant and equipment of any<br />

description, whether indicated on Drawings or otherwise, the Contractor shall<br />

ensure that the connecting pipes are suitably set and include such expansion<br />

fittings as required. The fixed point should be set at the plant or at the equipment.<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that the required "cold draw" is provided. The<br />

jointing of the loops and expansion fittings shall not proceed until it is shown, to<br />

the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative, that restraint has been correctly<br />

applied and that the runs are guided to provide for true axial movement.<br />

Expansion loops or bends shall be of one piece and preferably made at the tube or<br />

fitting manufacturer's works. If the total length of the tube or bend is such as to<br />

prohibit this, welds may be made in the long arm as near the centre as possible.<br />

No welds will be permitted in the crown of the bend or in the short arms and any<br />

seams shall be arranged at the side of the bends. All loops or bends shall be<br />

flanged and arranged to vent and drain naturally.<br />

All expansion loops and bends shall be so proportioned to accommodate the total<br />

stress set up in the material of the pipe wall, taking into account the stress<br />

components due to internal pressure, torsion and bending.<br />

All expansion loops and bends shall be fabricated from similar materials to the<br />

pipework systems in which they are installed, with flanged ends, erected in a<br />

horizontal plane and supported at the crest.<br />

All expansion loops and bends of joints shall be erected cold drawn to the extent<br />

of one half of the total expansion to be taken up and shall not be assembled before<br />

pipes are anchored.<br />

The cold draw shall be pulled by means of long bolts through the flanges. Bolts<br />

shall be pulled up diagonally to prevent uneven stressing and after the flanges are<br />

tight the bolts shall be replaced one by one with bolts of the correct 'length.<br />

In the event that the fitting of expansion loops and bends cannot be immediately<br />

possible, necessary distance pieces shall be inserted.<br />

b) Expansion Joints<br />

Expansion joints shall be of the straight bellows type and of axial pattern or as<br />

otherwise indicated. They shall be provided with screwed union or flanged ends<br />

as appropriate to facilitate replacement unless otherwise approved. They shall<br />

incorporate internal liners if required and shall be manufactured from 18/8<br />

stainless steel or other approved material appropriate to the duty and shall be<br />

designed to withstand the test pressure of the system. Bellows shall be capable of<br />

not less than 2,000 complete cycles of movement over the designed working<br />

range without failure. Pipework supports shall be arranged as near as possible to<br />

the joints.<br />

Expansion joints shall be selected to accommodate the maximum working<br />

temperature and temperature range of the systems. Rods or hangers shall be<br />

provided to take imposed end thrusts.<br />

Joints up to 38 mm. shall have screwed ends to B.S.P. and 50 mm. and upwards<br />

flanged ends to B.S. 10/4504. All compensators shall be installed in accordance<br />

with the manufacturer's recommendations.<br />

All expansion joints shall be provided with external protection where exposed to<br />

damage. For axial joints this shall comprise an external sleeve. Joints shall be<br />

installed so that they are not subjected to stresses other than those for which they<br />

are designed. Unless otherwise indicated they shall be installed so that they are in<br />

their free position at a temperature midway between the high and low limits of<br />

normal service.<br />

All connections between bellows and pipework shall be aligned prior to and<br />

during welding by means of welding clamps.<br />

Axial joints shall be installed in line with the axis of the pipe and shall not be<br />

subjected to any tension during installation other than that approved by the<br />

manufacturers.<br />

Flanged joints shall be pulled up diagonally across the flanges by means of long<br />

bolts after the joints are made the long bolts shall be removed diagonally one at a<br />

time and replaced with standard bolts, nuts and washers.<br />

Joints with flanged ends shall be installed during the erection of pipework if<br />

possible. Otherwise, temporary distance places of accurate dimensions shall be


c) Guides<br />

provided. Each such distance piece shall be exactly equal to the "installed" length<br />

of the compensators and shall have flanges precisely square with the pipe and<br />

flange bolt holes of the compensator. All expansion joints shall be securely<br />

locked in position prior to and during hydraulic testing. Should joints be unable to<br />

withstand test pressures they shall be isolated from the piping systems.<br />

End fittings for expansion joints on mild steel pipelines shall be of steel.<br />

Axial expansion joints shall be cold drawn during installation to an agreed<br />

amount not exceeding the manufacturer's recommendations.<br />

When installing manufactured expansion loops or bellow joints, the<br />

manufacturer's installation recommendation shall be observed in every respect.<br />

When testing the pressure at distribution mains, the Contractor shall ensure that<br />

the test pressure will not damage the bellows, where the test pressure exceeds the<br />

maximum operating pressure.<br />

All cleats, brackets and steel work required for building-in shall be supplied by<br />

the Contractor, unless stated otherwise elsewhere in the <strong>Specifications</strong>.<br />

Details of all anchors shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before<br />

manufacture.<br />

The bellows shall be installed with due allowance having been made for cold<br />

draw, which will vary according to the type and length of bellows proposed and<br />

the temperature of installation. Where "installation bars" or fittings are<br />

incorporated with the bellows during delivery and erection, these must be<br />

removed before heat is applied.<br />

Care shall be taken when installing flanged end bellows to line up the bolt holes<br />

on joint and mating flanges and to ensure that the joint is neither twisted in any<br />

way nor any torsion stress is being applied on it.<br />

Free guide sleeves shall be fitted on each side of the expansion joint, unless such<br />

joint be installed adjacent to an anchor point when guides shall be fitted on the<br />

free side only.<br />

Guides shall consist of a tube of diameter not more than 3 mm. greater than the<br />

outside diameter of the main and length four and a half times the diameter of the<br />

main with a minimum length of 300mm unless an alternative design is shown on<br />

the Tender Drawings.<br />

Guides shall be installed not more than one and a half pipe diameter from the<br />

expansion joint to the first tubular guide and not more than 15-20 pipe diameters<br />

between this guide and the next pipe support.<br />

Further pipe guides shall be provided along each pipeline at intervals equivalent<br />

to not more than 75 pipe diameters and where shown on the Drawings.<br />

The Contractor shall provide all necessary pipe guides to prevent long pipe spans<br />

from buckling and to ensure alignment and linear free movement of pipes from<br />

anchor points towards expansion joints constructed to prevent transverse<br />

movement and carefully installed so that axial movement is not hampered. Means<br />

for lubrication shall be provided where necessary.<br />

Each pipe guide on sections of pipework incorporating axial joints shall be of the<br />

tube type with rods tack welded to the guide, and arranged to locate and restrain<br />

the pipe in all planes. Alternatively pipe guides can be made on Site with two<br />

roller supports as shown on Drawings.<br />

Special supports and fixing accessories shall be provided at all heavy items of<br />

pipeline equipment; i.e. valves, etc, to ensure that no undue strain is placed upon<br />

the pipeline at their incidence.<br />

After fabrication, all ferrous fixings and supports shall be thoroughly wire<br />

brushed to remove dirt, scale, rust etc. and then given two coats of red oxide<br />

primer prior to bolting to or building into the building structure.<br />

Detailed drawings of pipe guides and supporting frames shall be submitted to the<br />

Engineer for written approval prior to manufacture.


8.36 DRAINING OF SYSTEM<br />

Drain points shall be provided by the Contractor at all accessible low points of water services<br />

installations and also on the branch side of all main isolating valves and cocks whether shown or<br />

not on the Drawings.<br />

Drain points shall be fitted with a lock shield drain cock of gunmetal construction manufactured to<br />

the requirements of B.S.2879-1980, type 'A', complete with hose union and removable key. The<br />

base of the pocket shall be drilled and tapped to accept a 15 mm. lever operated plug cock of<br />

suitable design.<br />

Drain points on MPHW/HPHW systems shall be fitted with a bronze needle valve with plugged<br />

outlet.<br />

8.37 PIPE SLEEVES<br />

In all cases where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings and footings, the Contractor shall<br />

provide sleeves which shall be built in and shall be responsible for ensuring that this is performed<br />

correctly. Sleeves shall in no case be used as pipe supports, a free annular space always being<br />

provided. Puddle flanges shall be provided on pipes passing through walls and trenches intended to<br />

be covered by earth, etc., or where passing through bund walls. Sleeves shall be of pipe cuttings<br />

properly reamed, cleaned and trimmed at 90° to bore.<br />

Sleeves in non-load bearing walls, floors ceiling and partitions shall be copper or mild steel to suit<br />

the particular pipe materials.<br />

Sleeves shall be provided with an inside diameter of not less than 15 mm. larger than the insulated<br />

outside diameter of the pipes. Pipes passing through load bearing walls or footings shall be<br />

provided with proprietary 'CSD' type pressure tight bulkhead seals suitable for up to a maximum<br />

differential water pressures of 138 Kg/m2 or alternatively, puddle flanged cast iron sleeves shall be<br />

provided with an internal diameter 100 mm. larger than the outside of the pipe. The space between<br />

the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed with a water tight mastic or silicon rubber compound. Gland<br />

plates not less than 6 mm. thick shall be fitted if necessary to withstand water pressures. Details of<br />

all sleeves arrangements through liquid - tight walls shall be submitted for approval.<br />

Where pipes pass through fire barriers proved proprietary approved fire rated 'CSD-F' type<br />

mechanical seals shall be provided or alternatively steel sleeves shall be installed with the space<br />

between the sleeves and pipework sealed with suitable fire rated material.<br />

External flashing sleeves shall be provided by the Contractor except where indicated otherwise.<br />

They shall incorporate an integral flange to which a flashing shield can be clamped or welded. The<br />

Contractor shall build the shield into the membrane and fill the space between the sleeves and pipe<br />

with waterproof materials or mastic compound.<br />

For pipes which change direction, oversized sleeves, the size larger than normal shall be fitted to<br />

allow for expansion. The space between the pipe enclosed and its sleeve shall be caulked with<br />

suitable filling material to be approved by the Engineer<br />

Sleeves shall not protrude from the finished face of` walls. In toilets, kitchens and all other situation<br />

where the floor may be swilled, the sleeve shall project 30 mm. above the finished floor level.<br />

8.38 FLOORPLATES<br />

Where exposed to view, pipes and tubing passing through walls, floors, ceilings, partitions and false<br />

ceilings of occupied rooms shall be fitted with a heavy chromium- plated die cast zinc alloy<br />

masking plate. Such plates shall be split on the diameter, be a snug fit to the pipe concerned and<br />

provided with countersunk holes for set screws.<br />

8.39 SAFETY VALVES<br />

All safety valves shall be to BS.759 and shall be set to discharge at 1.15 times the design pressure,<br />

or 5psig above the working pressure, whichever is the greater.<br />

8.40 VALVES AND STOPCOCKS<br />

Valves and stopcocks shall conform to the Table Appendix III at the end of this Section of the<br />

<strong>Specifications</strong> unless detailed differently in the particular Section of the <strong>Specifications</strong>.<br />

8.41 PRESSURE, ALTITUDE AND TEMPERATURE GAUGES<br />

Where depicted on the schematics and as generally described hereunder the Contractor shall supply<br />

and install a thermometer, altitude or pressure gauge.


Thermometers shall be fitted on each chiller, boiler cylinder (if not included for in the<br />

manufacturer's specification) on flow and return headers and on each return main prior to<br />

connection into the return header, on the secondary side of all calorifiers and on the down stream<br />

side of all mixing valves.<br />

Thermometers shall be to BS.1704 dependent upon whether the application calls for a straight or<br />

angular pattern'. They shall all be calibrated in both centigrade and Fahrenheit and be supplied with<br />

a loose red pointer to be set at the design working temperature. The scale range shall be suitable for<br />

a maximum temperature approximately. They shall be supplied with a pocket suitable for insertion<br />

into the fluid concerned. All gauges fitted within the Plant Room, Calorfier Room, Chiller Area,<br />

Pump Rooms, AHU Rooms and Tank Room shall have a 150mm diameter dial gauge fitted;<br />

elsewhere they shall be 100 mm diameter dial.<br />

Altitude Gauges shall be fitted on each heat exchanger; i.e. boiler, calorifier, chiller, etc.<br />

Altitude gauges shall be to BS.1780. They shall be supplied with a loose red pointer to be set at the<br />

design working head and be calibrated in both meters and feet. The scale range shall be suitable for<br />

a maximum of approximately twice the design head.<br />

All gauges shall be supplied with a suitable angle or pigtail siphon and gunmetal gauge cock. All<br />

gauges fitted on chillers, chilled water pumps within the plant rooms, calorifiers rooms, and tank<br />

room shall have a 150mm round dial gauge fitted; elsewhere they shall be 100mm. round dial.<br />

Pressure Gauges shall be fitted on either side of pumps sets (where duty standby or multiple pump<br />

configurations are installed, pressure gauges shall be on the common discharge not a pair per pump<br />

set).<br />

Pressure gauges shall be as manufactured to B.S.1780. They shall be supplied with a loose red<br />

pointer to be set at the design working head and be calibrated in bars gauge. The scale range shall<br />

be suitable for a maximum of approximately twice the design head.<br />

All pressure gauges shall be back-plate mounted on varnished hardwood panel with chamfered<br />

edges. The panel shall have labeling to indicate the pump function and inlet and outlet condition.<br />

Piping to the pressure gauges shall be in copper and be neatly run to the pump.<br />

8.42 ACOUSTIC STANDARDS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATION,<br />

GENERAL<br />

1. All building equipment (plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, electrical and<br />

elevators) including piping and ductwork shall be installed to produce sound pressure levels<br />

within occupied spaces not to exceed limits as specified in section 3.<br />

2. All such building equipment, including piping, ductwork, linen and rubbish chutes, shall be so<br />

installed that its operation causes no objectionable structure-borne noise or vibration<br />

transmission to occupied spaces. Isolation hangers, pads, insulation layers, airspace will all be<br />

required in different cases. Each potential source of vibration must be reviewed and means of<br />

isolation specified.<br />

3. All building equipment including towers, fresh air intake, spill or exhaust louver faces or<br />

gratings shall be so and installed that they result in no objectionable noise transmission to<br />

adjoining proprieties or neighbors, and conform to local codes and regulations.<br />

4. All hotel operating equipment, including mechanical plant and engineering maintenance, shall<br />

produce noise levels in their respective areas not to exceed 85 dB, measured on a scale A.<br />

FOUNDATION AND VIBRATION ISOLATION<br />

a. All equipment, piping, etc., shall be mounted on or suspended from approved foundations<br />

and supports, all as specified herein.<br />

b. All concrete foundations and supports (and required reinforcing therefore) shall be<br />

provided by the contractor. Furnish shop drawings and templates for all concrete<br />

foundations and supports, and furnish for setting all required bolts and other appurtenances<br />

necessary for the proper installation of his equipment. All such work shall be shown in<br />

detail on the shop drawings, which drawings shall be submitted to the engineer showing<br />

the complete details of all foundations, including the necessary concrete and steel work,<br />

vibration isolation devices etc.<br />

c. All floor mounted equipment shall be erected on 4 inch high concrete pads over the<br />

complete area of the equipment, unless specified to the contrary herein. Wherever<br />

hereinafter vibration eliminating devices and/.or concrete inertia blocks are specified, these


items shall, in all cases, be in turn mounted upon raised concrete pads unless specified tot<br />

he contrary herein.<br />

d. Mounting systems and components of the isolation mounting shall not be resonant with<br />

any of the forcing frequencies of the supported equipment or piping. Mounting sizes shall<br />

be determined by the mounting manufacturer and mounting shall be installed in<br />

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />

e. All mounting systems exposed to weather and other corrosive environments shall be<br />

protected with factory corrosion resistance. All metal parts of mountings (except springs<br />

and hardware) to be hot dip galvanized. Springs shall be cadmium plated and neoprene<br />

coated. Nuts and bolts shall be cadmium plated.<br />

f. Where supplementary steel is required to support piping and/or ductwork, this steel shall<br />

be designed to provide a maximum deflection of 0.08 inch at the mid span under the<br />

supported load. The piping shall be rigidly supported form the supplementary steel and the<br />

supplementary steel isolated from he building structure by means of isolators described in<br />

paragraphs entitled "support of piping and boiler breeching - mounting type XT".<br />

g. Where steel spring isolation systems are described in the following specifications, the<br />

mounting assemblies shall utilize bare springs with the spring diameter not less than 0.8 of<br />

the loaded operating height of the spring. Each spring isolator shall be designed and<br />

installed so that the ends of the spring remain parallel during and after installation. The<br />

spring specified minimum deflection from loaded operating height to spring solid height<br />

shall be 50% of the rated deflection. The maximum motion of any resiliently supported<br />

equipment at startup or shutdown shall be 1/4 inch approved resilient lateral restraints shall<br />

be provided as required to limit motions in excess of 1/4 inch.<br />

FLOOR MOUNTING OF CENTRIFUGAL FANS - MOUNTING TYPE I<br />

1. Each fan and driving motor shall be mounted on an integral one-piece structural mounting<br />

frame, reinforced as necessary to prevent flexure of the frame at startup and during<br />

operation of the fan. The utilized structural mounting frame for the fan and mortar shall<br />

include motor slide rails., The structural steel mounting forms and shall be drilled and<br />

tapped to receive the fan and motor so that the frame shall act as a template.<br />

2. The structural steel integral mounting frame shall be supported on steel spring mountings.<br />

These mountings shall be positioned in accordance with the weight distribution to insure<br />

adequate deflection and vibration isolation. Housing or snubbing devices shall not be used<br />

to contain the isolation sprigs.<br />

FLOOR MOUNTING OF CENTRIFUGAL FANS - MOUNTING TYPE II<br />

1. Each such fan and motor shall be mounted on a reinforced spring supported concrete<br />

inertia block. The block shall be poured within structural perimeter frame set on roofing<br />

paper. The structural perimeter frame, complete with motor slide trails, height saving<br />

spring mounting brackets, springs and equipment anchor bolt templates shall be provided<br />

by the vibration control vendor. Spring supports shall be located under the brackets and<br />

shall incorporate a neoprene acoustical pad and leveling adjustment to raise the entire<br />

isolation base 2 inches above the foundation pad.<br />

2. Reinforced concrete inertia base thickness shall be in accordance with the following<br />

schedules:-<br />

Motor Size<br />

Inertia Block<br />

Thickness Required<br />

Up to 50 hp<br />

8 inches<br />

60 to 75 hp 10 inches<br />

100 hp and greater 12 inches<br />

FLOOR MOUNTING OF CENTRIFUGAL FANS - MOUNTING TYPE III<br />

This equipment shall be mounted exactly as that described for mounting Type I, except that<br />

mountings shall be neoprene-in-shear<br />

MOUNTING OF FACTORY ASSEMBLED FANS, TUBULAR FANS AND BELTED VENT<br />

SETS - MOUNTING TYPE IV


Each such equipment shall be mounted on neoprene-in-shear isolators.<br />

MOUNTING OF FACTORY FANS AND AXIAL FLOW FANS - MOUNTING TYPE V<br />

This equipment shall be mounted directly on stable bare steel spring isolators, except that where the<br />

units to be mounted are furnished with internal structural frames and external lugs (both of suitable<br />

strength and rigidity) or without any severe overhangs, no additional structural frame need be<br />

provided beneath the unit. In any event, motor shall be integrally mounted to the unit and shall be<br />

mounted on slide rails.<br />

MOUNTING OF CEILING SUPPORTED FACTORY ASSEMBLED FANS, AXIAL FLOW<br />

FANS, TUBULAR FANS AND BELTED VENT SETS - MOUNTING TYPE VI<br />

1. All such units shall be hung by means of vibration isolator hangers consisting of a steel<br />

housing or retainer incorporating a steel spring.<br />

2. If the equipment to be mounted is not furnished with integral structural mounting frames<br />

and external mounting lugs (both of suitable strength and rigidity), approved structural<br />

sub-base shall be installed in the field which shall support the equipment to be hung and to<br />

which shall be attached the hangers.<br />

3. Diagonal hanger rod isolators shall be provided as required to limit horizontal motion to<br />

1/4 inch maximum under fan operating conditions.<br />

MOUNTING OF CEILING SUPPORTED FACTORY ASSEMBLED FANS, AXIAL FLOW<br />

FANS, TUBULAR FANS AND BELTED VENT SETS- MOUNTING TYPE VII<br />

1. This equipment shall be mounted as described under mounting type VII.<br />

2. Diagonal hanger rod isolators shall be provided as required to limit horizontal motion to<br />

1/4 inch maximum under fan operating conditions.<br />

MOUNTING OF CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (GREATER THAN 3 hp) - MOUNTING TYPE VIII<br />

1. Each pump with its driving motor shall be bolted and grouted to a spring supported<br />

concrete inertia base reinforced as required.<br />

2. Each concrete base (rectangular or "T" shape) for horizontally split pumps shall include<br />

supports and base elbows for the suction and discharge connections. Base elbow shall be<br />

bolted and grouted to the concrete foundation.<br />

3. Reinforced concrete inertia base thickness shall be in accordance with the following<br />

schedule:-<br />

Motor Size<br />

Inertia Block<br />

Thickness Required<br />

5 hp to 15 hp 6 inches<br />

20 hp to 50 hp 8 inches<br />

60 hp to 100 hp 10 inches<br />

Greater than 100 hp<br />

12 inches<br />

4. The spring supported reinforced concrete inertia foundation shall be poured within<br />

structural perimeter frame of the required thickness indicated in the above schedule. The<br />

structural perimeter frame shall be equipped with height saving brackets and stable bare<br />

spring isolators having spring diameters no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the<br />

spring at rated load. The mountings shall provide minimum static deflection of 1 inch<br />

unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Structural perimeter frame, mounting templates,<br />

saving brackets and spring system shall be provided as an assembly by the vibration<br />

control vendor. There shall be a minimum of 2 inch operating clearance between the pump<br />

inertia base and the foundation pad.<br />

MOUNTING OF CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (3hp OR LESS) - MOUNTING TYPE IX<br />

1. Pumps 3 hp or less shall be bolted and grouted to rubber-in-shear supported reinforced<br />

concrete inertia blocks that are a minimum of 6 inches thick. Rubber-in-shear isolators<br />

shall provide a minimum static deflection of 3/8 inch and shall be protected against<br />

corrosion.<br />

2. Provide base below supports and structural perimeter frames and reinforcement as<br />

described for mounting type VIII.


MOUNTING OF REFRIGERATION MACHINES & BOILERS - MOUNTING TYPE X<br />

Each boiler and refrigeration machine (cooler, condenser, compressor and motor) shall be installed<br />

on an integral one-piece steel rigid structural frame which shall be installed on spring supported<br />

mountings. Each spring mounting shall be bare and stable and shall provide a minim static<br />

deflection of 1 inch. All spring mountings shall incorporate a leveling device, neoprene acoustical<br />

pad and built-in vertical stop to prevent spring extension when equipment is removed from he base<br />

or cooler and condensers drained.<br />

MOUNTING OF PACKAGED DX UNITS<br />

1. Resiliently floor support units on mountings providing a minimum static deflection of 3/8<br />

inch.<br />

2. Resiliently suspend units with mountings types providing a minimum static deflection of 1<br />

inch.<br />

SUPPORT OF PIPING AND BOILER BREACHING - MOUNTING TYPE XI<br />

1. The following boiler breeching, water, emergency generator combustion exhaust piping,<br />

and fuel oil piping shall be resiliently supported.<br />

a. All piping and boiler breeching in equipment rooms.<br />

b. Piping within 50 feet of connected water piping on roof.<br />

2. Resilient diagonal mountings or other approved devices shall be provided as required to<br />

limit piping motion due to equipment startup or shutdown, to a maximum of 1/8 inch.<br />

3. Isolators for water piping shall be resiliently spring and neoprene supported with<br />

mountings providing a minimum static deflect on 7/8 inch. The spring elements of the<br />

mounting shall have a first harmonic natural frequency of no less than 360 cps.<br />

4. Isolators for all other piping and boiler breeching shall be supported by means of<br />

neoprene-in-shear mountings providing a minimum static deflection of 1/2 inch.<br />

5. Where supplementary steel is required to support piping, the supplementary steel shall be<br />

sized so that maximum deflection between supports does not exceed 0.08 inch and shall be<br />

resiliently supported from the building structure with mountings as described in the<br />

preceding two paragraphs. Supported piping from the supplementary steel shall be rigidly<br />

suspended or supported.<br />

6. Positioning type hanger rod isolators shall be provided for boiler breeching and for all<br />

piping greater than 12 inch diameter and all supplementary steel supports.<br />

PIPING ANCHORS, GUIDES AND SUPPORTS - MOUNTING TYPE XII<br />

1. Pipe guides, anchors and supports in all risers, and piping anchors in mechanical<br />

equipment rooms or occupied spaces shall be isolated from the building structure so that<br />

there shall be no direct metal-to-metal or metal-to-structure contact of the piping with the<br />

building structure.<br />

2. Piping Guides<br />

i. Steel guides shall be welded to the pipe at a maximum spacing of 60 degrees. The<br />

outside diameter of the opposing guide bars shall be smaller than the inside<br />

diameter of the pipe riser clamps in accordance with standard filed construction<br />

practice. Each end of pipe anchor shall be rigidly attached to an all directional<br />

pipe anchor isolation mounting which, in turn, shall be rigidly fastened to the<br />

supplementary steel framing within the shaft in an approved manner.<br />

ii. The all directional pipe anchor isolation mountings shall consist of a telescoping<br />

arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum of 1/2 inch<br />

thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation pad. Vertical restraints shall<br />

be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either<br />

direction. The allowable load on the isolation material shall not exceed 500p.s.i.<br />

iii. Low temperature piping guides shall be constructed with a 360 degree 10 gauge<br />

metal sleeve around the piping. The thermal insulation requirements for the<br />

piping shall be provided between the piping and the sleeve. Heavy duty neoprene<br />

and canvas duck isolation pad of thickness equal to thermal insulation<br />

requirements shall space the metal sleeve away from the piping with suitable<br />

thermal insulation provided in the voids between the pipe sleeve and isolation pad


material. The metal sleeve outside diameter shall be smaller than the pipe riser<br />

clamp inside diameter in accordance with standard field construction practice.<br />

The pipe riser clamp shall be rigidly attached to the steel guide framing within the<br />

shaft.<br />

3. Anchors<br />

i. The pipe clamp at anchor points shall be welded to the pipe and to acoustical pipe<br />

anchor mountings which, in turn, shall be rigidly fastened to the steel guide<br />

framing.<br />

ii.<br />

The acoustical pipe anchor mountings shall be capable of safely accepting loads<br />

developed by the installed piping and shall consist of a bolted assembly of steel<br />

plates with lamination of 1/2 inch thick heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck<br />

isolation material. A heat shield of 1/4 inch asbestos transit shall be provided as<br />

required. The isolation material loading shall not exceed 500psi.<br />

4. Supports<br />

i. Piping supports within shafts shall be provided with suitable bearing plates and<br />

two layers of 1/4 inch thick ribbed or waffled neoprene and loaded for 50psi<br />

maximum. The isolation pads shall be separated with 1/4 inch steel plate.<br />

ii.<br />

Piping isolation supports at the base of risers shall be two layers or 1/2 inch thick<br />

heavy duty neoprene and canvas duck isolation pad separated by 1/4 inch thick<br />

steel plate. Suitable bearing plates sized to provide a pad loading of 500psi<br />

maximum shall be provided. The stanchion between the pipe and isolation<br />

support shall be welded to the pipe and welded or bolted to the isolation support.<br />

The isolation support shall be bolted to the floor slab with resilient sleeves.<br />

5. Piping Penetration of shafts, Floor slabs and/or Partitions<br />

There shall be no direct contact of piping with shaft walls, floor slabs and/or partitions.<br />

MOUNTING OF AIR COMPRESSOR - MOUNTING TYPE XIII<br />

PNEUMATIC TUBE EXHAUSTED & DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS - MOUNT OF<br />

NEOPRENE-IN-SHEAR ISOLATORS PROVIDING MINIMUM 10MM (3/8"0 DEFLECTION)<br />

aa. Provide, as shown or as approved, all necessary supports for equipment furnished under<br />

this section. To meet the varying conditions in each case, these supports shall consist of<br />

pipe-stands, steel angle or strap hangers, saddles brackets, etc. as shown, or as approved.<br />

All such supports shall have substantial flanges bolted to floor construction. Hangers shall<br />

be supported from the framing as described herein above. Supports shall be properly<br />

located with reference to any supporting pads, legs, etc., of the equipment carried and must<br />

be of such number and so distributed as not to bring any undue strains upon the equipment.<br />

All details shall be as approved.<br />

bb. Provide suitable brackets, pipe stands, piers or other supports for all various float traps,<br />

receivers, etc. Also provide suitable supports for all tempering stacks, air filters, mixing<br />

and control dampers, etc., securely clamped to steel beams, column or bearing walls. All<br />

details of this work shall be as shown on the drawings, or as approved.<br />

cc. Guarantee that the work as installed under this section of the specifications will not result<br />

in the transmission of objectionable noise or vibration to any occupied parts of the<br />

building, and take full responsibility for any necessary modifications of this equipment, or<br />

of the foundations and supports for the same, necessary to secure this result.<br />

WATER NOISE CONTROL<br />

1. Where flush valves are specified, generally for public toilets only, they shall be equal to<br />

Sloan Royal Quiet Flush Valves, Model 110 for water closets, Model 186 for urinals.<br />

Piston type will not be considered.<br />

2. Pipes shall be sized to provide maximum water velocities as follows:-<br />

Pipe Size<br />

Maximum Velocity


up to 50mm (2")<br />

0.6 m/sec. (2 fps.)<br />

65 to 100mm (1 1/2" to 4") 0.8 m/sec. (2.5 fps.)<br />

125 to 200mm (5" to 8") 1.5 m/sec. (5 fps.)<br />

250 to 300mm (10" to 12") 2.5 m/sec. (8 fps.)<br />

355mm and up (over 14") 3.0 m/sec. (10 fps.)<br />

3. All piping, especially in mechanical shafts, chases and suspended ceilings shall be so<br />

installed that it is neither in contact with nor rigidly fastened to structural or architectural<br />

elements of the building. All such piping including domestic water, chilled water and<br />

condenser water must be properly supported in resilient pads of approved type.<br />

All pipes penetrating building walls must be installed in steel pipe sleeves, with fiber glass<br />

packing between the pipe and the sleeve to insure against transmission of any vibration<br />

from the pipes to the walls., Where steel tubs are used, in places where cast iron is not<br />

readily available, the tub must be set in a sound deadening bed.<br />

ACOUSTIC REVIEW<br />

The contractor engineers shall have the design and the workshop drawings and documents reviewed<br />

for compliance with the above standards and operators standards by an acoustical consultant<br />

approved by the operator and engineer.<br />

ON-SITE ACOUSTICAL TESTING<br />

Engineers for a project shall provide a schedule or preliminary and final tests to be made on site,<br />

including tests of typical guestrooms, meeting rooms, movable partitions etc. Tests shall be in<br />

accordance with procedures established by the Acoustical consultant and approved by the operator<br />

and engineer<br />

Contractors shall be required to correct work where necessary to obtain satisfactory acoustical<br />

results in compliance with the foregoing standards.<br />

8.43 TESTING<br />

The Engineer shall witness all testing and commissioning and shall have access at all reasonable<br />

times to such parts of the Contractor's and Suppliers' works as may be necessary for the purpose of<br />

inspecting, examining and testing the materials, workmanship and performance.<br />

8.44 NOTICE PRIOR TO TESTING<br />

The Contractor shall give the Engineer seven days' written notice of his intention to carry out a test<br />

and shall have carried out all necessary adjustment prior to commencing the test.<br />

8.45 TESTING IN SECTIONS<br />

The Contractor shall allow for testing and commissioning the installation in sections as may be<br />

required in order to conform to the program. All piping work and ductwork in these sections shall<br />

be sealed and tested as specified below, so that the insulation can be applied and the section<br />

completed to assist the program.<br />

8.46 TESTING OF PIPEWORK, WELDS, ETC.<br />

The whole installation shall be hydraulically tested to twice the working pressure of the systems or<br />

4.137 bar, whichever is the greater.<br />

Gas piping work shall be tested as above, but utilizing an inert gas.<br />

The pressure shall be maintained for a period of two hours in each case, and due allowance shall be<br />

made for attendance by the Engineer during the progress of such tests. The Contractor shall also be<br />

responsible for arranging for the water authority to witness this test should they require so. Any<br />

equipment fitted not suitable for this pressure shall be adequately protected or isolated from the<br />

system during the test.<br />

All leaks are to be immediately repaired and the installations retested until the above requirements<br />

are obtained.<br />

The Contractor shall allow for such emptying and refilling and maintenance until all leaks have<br />

been satisfactorily stopped.<br />

Upon completion of the final hydraulic test on the system, the Contractor shall apply heat and open<br />

all valves and charge the calorifiers.<br />

All valves and stopcocks throughout the system shall be adjusted and regulated until all circuits are<br />

working under normal conditions and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Joints found to be faulty<br />

under heat are to be completely remade.


All tests are to be carried out before application of the paint or insulation and valve adjustments<br />

made with the circulating pumps in operation.<br />

The Contractor shall ensure that before informing the Engineer of the proposed tests, all remedial<br />

work has been carried out and that there are no leaks. Failure to comply with this Clause could<br />

result in a charge being made by the Engineer to the Contractor for the abortive visit.<br />

Each welder shall be assigned a reference, which shall be stamped on each weld and when the<br />

general hydraulic tests of the completed systems are carried out, each weld shall be lightly<br />

hammered during the time that pressure is maintained.<br />

If any leaks occur at welds, the portion of the weld near the leak shall be cut out and re-welded.<br />

Such leaks shall not be repaired by caulking or attempted fusion of the surrounding metal. Should a<br />

considerable portion of the welded joints made by a particular operator be found to be defective due<br />

to faulty workmanship, all such welds shall be cut out and re-welded by another operator, whose<br />

work has proved satisfactory.<br />

During the progress of the Works, inspection will be made by the Engineer to ensure that all burrs<br />

and swarf have been removed from cuts and that the cuts have been made square.<br />

The Engineer reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to cut open any sections of the piping<br />

network to inspect cuts or to have welded joints laboratory tests.<br />

If the test and inspection should prove that the welds are to the required standard or that all burrs<br />

and swarf have been removed, the Client will pay costs incurred by the Contractor in removing<br />

testing and replacing the Sections of piping work. If, however, the inspection and test show that the<br />

welds or cuts are below the class of workmanship for this class of work, or if they are found to be<br />

faulty in any respect, the Contractor shall make good any such faults free of cost to the Client and<br />

shall pay all fees incurred by the tests.


APPENDIX I<br />

MINIMUM THICKNESS OF INSULATION<br />

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />

Size of Pipe in mm. Minimum Thickness (mm) of Insulation<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />

Steel Copper Chilled Water<br />

Un Conditioned<br />

Areas<br />

Chilled Water<br />

Conditioned Areas<br />

All Cold Water<br />

System, Cold<br />

Feeds & Open<br />

Vents<br />

L.T.H.W.<br />

D.H.W.S.<br />

Systems<br />

M.T.H.W.<br />

Systems<br />

Condense<br />

15 15 25 25 10 32 32 50<br />

20 22 25 25 10 32 50 50<br />

25 28 25 25 10 32 50 50<br />

32 35 32 25 10 32 50 50<br />

40 42 32 25 10 38 50 50<br />

50 54 32 25 10 50 50 50<br />

65 67 38 32 10 50 50 50<br />

80 76 38 32 10 50 50 63<br />

100 108 38 38 10 50 50 75<br />

125 133 38 38 10 50 63 75<br />

150 159 50 38 10 50 63 100<br />

200 - 50 38 10 63 63 100<br />

250 - 50 38 10 63 63 100<br />

300 - 50 38 10 63 75 100<br />

350 - 50 38<br />

External (all sizes) 50<br />

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />

Declared Up to Up to Up to Up to<br />

Up to<br />

Thermal<br />

Conductivity 0.026 0.040 0.040 0.040<br />

0.055<br />

(w/m per °C<br />

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />

H.T.H.W<br />

Systems<br />

& Steam


APPENDIX NO. II VALVES<br />

Service Types Size Specification<br />

L.P.H.W. & Chilled Water Isolation and Regulation Up to & inc. 50. mm. Bronzegate valve screwed to BSPT PN20-B.S.5154<br />

L.P.H.W. & Chilled Water Orifice Valve Up to & inc. 50mm/ Bronze orifice valve balancing screwed BSPT PN-20B.S.5154<br />

L.P.H.W. & Chilled Water Double Regulating valve Up to & inc. 50mm Bronze double regulating valve screwed BSPT PN20-B.S.7350<br />

L.P.H.W. & Chilled Water Isolation and Regulation 65 mm. & over Cast iron gate valve flanged PN16-B.S.5150<br />

L.P.H.W. & Chilled Water Orifice Valve 65 mm. & over Cast iron orific valve flanged PN16-B.S.7350<br />

L.P.H.W. & Chilled Water Double Regulating Valve 65 mm. & over Cast iron orifice valve flanged PN16-B.S.7350<br />

L.P.H.W. & Chilled Water Fan Convectors, H/L Pipe Up to 32 mm. Bronze straight radiator valves screwed BSPT-B.S.2767<br />

Coils and Fan Coil/Units<br />

L.P.H.W. & Chilled Water Radiators Up to 32 mm. Bronze angle radiator valve screwed BSPT-B.S.2767<br />

L.P.H.W. & Chilled Water Check Valves Up to &inc. 50mm. Bronze swing check valve screwed BSPT PN25-B.S. 5154<br />

L.P.H.W. & Chilled Water Check Valves 65 mm. & over Cast iron swing check valve flanged PN16-B.S.5153<br />

Gas Isolation Up to & inc. 50mm. Lubricated cast iron plug cock screwed BSPT PN 16<br />

Gas Isolation 65 mm. & over Lubricated cast iron cock flanged PN16<br />

Oil Isolation Up to & inc. 50 mm. Bronze gate valve screwed BSPT PN20-B.S.5154<br />

Oil Isolation 65 mm. & over Cast iron valve split wedge flanged PN20<br />

M.C.W.S. Stopcock Up to & inc. 54 mm. Gunmetal stopcock with loose jumper<br />

M.C.W.S. Stop Valves 67 mm. & over Cast iron gate valve flanged PN20-B.S.5150<br />

Boosted, Tanked Cold & Stopcock Up to 54mm. where Gunmental stopcock with loose jumper<br />

Hot Water Services Is no circulation<br />

Boosted, Tanked Cold & Isolation Up to & inc. 54 mm. Bronze gate valve screwed BSPT PN20-B.S.5154<br />

Hot Water Services<br />

Boosted, Tanked Cold & Isolation All sizes where Flanging Bronze gate valve flanged PN20-B.S.5154<br />

Hot water services to equipment<br />

Drains Plantroom boiler house Up to & inc. 50 mm. Bronze gland cock screwed BSPT hose union<br />

Drains Other low level positions Up to & inc. 50mm. Bronze cock screwed BSPT hose union B.S.2879<br />

Steam Isolation 15mm. – 32mm Bronze globe valve screwed BSPT PN40-B.S.5154


APPENDIX NO. II VALVES<br />

Service Types Size Specification<br />

Steam Isolation 40 mm. – 80 mm. Bronzeglobevalve flanged PN 32-B.S.5154<br />

Steam Isolation 100mm. and above Cast steel parallel slide PN 16<br />

Condensate Isolation 15 mm. – 32 mm. Bronze gate valve screwed BSPT PN20-B.S.5154<br />

Condensate Isolation 40 mm. and above Bronze gate flanged PN20-B.S.5154<br />

Condensate Check 15 m. – 25 mm. Bronze horizontal lift check valve screwed BSPT PN32-B.S.5154<br />

Condensate Check 32 mm. – and above Bronze horizontal lift check valve flanged PN 16-B.S.5154<br />

M/H PHW Isolation Up to and inc. 50 mm. Bronze parallel slide valve flanged PN 25 – B.S.5154<br />

M/H PHW Isolation 65 mm. and above Cast steel parallel slide valve PN 16-B.S. 5157<br />

M/H PHW Double regulation Up to and inc. 50 mm. Cast steel parallel slide flanged PN 16-B.S.5157<br />

M/H PHW Double regulation 65 mm. and above Bronze orifice valve flanged PN25-B.S.5154<br />

M/H PHW Orifice valve Up to and inc. 50 mm. Cast iron double regulating valve flanged PN 16-B.S.5152<br />

M/H PHW Orifice Valve 65 mm. and above Cast iron double regulating valve flanged PN 16-B.S.5152


APPENDIX NO. III<br />

The following table indicates the recommended spacing for pipe supports and guides:<br />

Steel Piping (Temperatures up to 100 °C ).<br />

Pipe Size Distance Between Distance Hanger<br />

Alignment between Supports Rod Dia<br />

in mm. Guides (meters) Bare Insulated mm.<br />

______ _____________ _ _____ Horizontal Vertical ______<br />

15 3.0 1.8 1.8 2.4 10<br />

20 3.0 2.4 2.4 2.4 10<br />

25 3.0 2.4 2.4 2.4 10<br />

32 3.0 2.7 2.4 3.0 12<br />

40 3.0 3.0 2.4 3.7 12<br />

50 4.0 3.0 2.7 3.7 12<br />

65 4.6 3.4 2.7 3.7 16<br />

80 5.8 3.7 3.0 4.3 16<br />

100 7.6 4.0 3.0 4.6 16<br />

125 9.0 4.6 3.7 5.5 16<br />

150 10.6 4.9 4.5 5.5 16<br />

200 13.7 5.5 6.0 8.5 16<br />

250 18.0 6.0 6.5 9.0 20<br />

300 21.2 6.4 7.0 10.0 24<br />

400 27.4 7.0 8.25 10.0 30<br />

450 30.0 7.3 8.6 10.0 36<br />

500 9.0 10.0<br />

600 9.6 10.0<br />

For temperatures above 100 °C use rod sizes given in Table (8) of BS 397


14 Electrical Works<br />

General Terms<br />

1. Scope of Work<br />

The following specifications and bills of quantities refer to the electrical, power, lighting and communication<br />

installation works in Nablus Mental Health Center.<br />

Works to be executed as part of this contract/tender include: -<br />

* Supply and installation of the secondary switchboards.<br />

* Installation of supply cables for main and secondary switchboards, in the building, and for the electrical<br />

switchboards of such systems as air-conditioning, central heating, etc.<br />

* Electrical installations for lighting, power supply sockets and other installations.<br />

* Supply and installation of luminaries (Lighting Fixtures) for general lighting<br />

* Supply and installation of communications cabinets and low current system installations.<br />

* Supply and installation of trellis trays and/ or sheet metal ducts for electricity and communications.<br />

* Supply and installation of an Intercom System.<br />

* Supply and installation of a Fire-Detection and Fire Alarm system.<br />

* Supply and installation of Computer System.<br />

1


2. The Electrical & Communication Systems - General Description<br />

* The main electrical switchboard for the new floor will be installed in the corridor. This switchboard will<br />

receive its power supply from the MDB in 1 st Floor.<br />

* Secondary electrical switchboards will be installed into the building. These secondary switchboards are to<br />

supply power for the required lighting, equipments and socket outlets on the floors and/ or areas associated<br />

with it.<br />

* These secondary switchboards will receive their power supply from the main electrical switchboard or from<br />

other secondary switchboards, all according to the electrical power supply descriptions in the drawings.<br />

* The electrical cables supplying power to the secondary switchboards will be installed into conduits with<br />

appropriate size laid into ground slab or floor slab or in cable trays over the false ceiling.<br />

* A communication cabinet will be installed into the building. This cabinet is to serve as a central distribution<br />

cabinet for all signaling and communications systems into that floor.<br />

* The main communication and signaling cables will be installed into conduits with appropriate size laid into<br />

ground slab or floor slab or in cable trays over the false ceiling.<br />

3. Compliance with Regulations and Standards<br />

The electrical installation must meet all the requirements of the Electrical Authority. The electrical installation<br />

must meet all the requirements of international standards, which apply to any part, component or accessory<br />

thereof, and in the absence of applicable Local Standards, all parts; components and accessories must comply<br />

with British or German standards (In that order).<br />

4. Compliance with Agreements<br />

All works associated with this contract/tender will be executed in accordance with these specifications. These<br />

specifications constitute a complementary supplement to the General specifications. In any event of a point or<br />

issue for which contradicting instructions had been given in different publications, the documents listed below<br />

shall take precedence, in the following order:<br />

• Bill Of Quantities,<br />

• The plans/ drawings,<br />

• These specifications,<br />

• The general specifications.<br />

The "Preliminaries" sections included in the construction works specifications equally apply to these<br />

specifications.<br />

5. Compliance with Plans and <strong>Specifications</strong><br />

The electrical installation must be executed with complete adherence to the plans and other contractual<br />

documents. Any change of plan must be authorized, in writing, by the supervisor. This requirement applies to<br />

changes suggested by the contractor as well as to changes demanded by the supervisor.<br />

6. Quality Assurance and Licensing Requirements<br />

All works must be executed to the highest standards and in accordance with the applicable requirements of the<br />

Electrical Authority. The contractor must have a government-issued license for electrical works of the "Chief<br />

Electrician" type, and he must have in his permanent employment, on the site, electrical engineer with at least<br />

five years experience.<br />

The contractor must also employ as sufficient number of employees to ensure the proper progress of his work<br />

and its completion's on time. The engineer, the supervisor or his representative may reject the work or any part<br />

thereof if the work or any part thereof had not been carried out in accordance with the correction and/ or the<br />

specification and/ or the required professional standards. The contractor should employ the assistance of subcontractors<br />

and the appropriate specialists for all special jobs, which, in the supervisor opinion, are not within<br />

2


the normal scope of the contractor's expertise. The supervision may reject any employee, manufacturer, etc.<br />

Who, in his opinion, is not suitable for the execution of the work in question?<br />

7. Quality of Materials<br />

All materials and equipment used for the execution of the work must be new and of the best quality, and must<br />

be approved by the supervisor before execution. The equipment and/ or materials must comply with the<br />

following European standards: VDE, IEC, or BS. The equipment and/or materials must be accompanied by a<br />

certificate of testing by an authorized institute, to confirm their compliance with the applicable standard. All<br />

expenses incurred in connection with these tests and in connection with other tests, if required by the<br />

supervisor, will be covered by the contractor.<br />

The contractor must submit to the supervisor samples of all materials, accessories and all other parts of the<br />

installation, in order to obtain the later 's approval for these elements prior to execution. All samples will be<br />

kept on the site, at such a location as determined by the supervisor.<br />

In addition to complying with the applicable standards, the equipment and materials must agree with the<br />

samples approved by the supervisor. Any equipment and/or materials which fail to agree with the<br />

aforementioned samples will be removed from the site by the contractor at his expense, and the contractor<br />

would have to supply other equipment and/or materials which agree with the plans, specifications and samples<br />

approved by the supervisor in place of those removed.<br />

8. Approval of Samples<br />

The approval of samples of materials and/or equipment by the supervisor, does not in any way detract from the<br />

contractor's full and exclusive responsibility for the quality of equipment and materials supplied in the model<br />

of those samples, in accordance with the quality definitions prescribed in the specifications and/ or applicable<br />

standards.<br />

9. Additional Tests<br />

The supervisor may demand from the contractor that samples of materials/ equipment, in whole or in part, be<br />

submitted to testing. These tests, if required, will be conducted by the Local Standards Institute, at the<br />

contractor's expense, without meriting any additional payment.<br />

10. Equipment & Materials<br />

In the submittal of his proposal, the contractor must undertake and specifically state that all the materials and<br />

equipment required in order to complete the installation are readily available to him, and that they will be<br />

delivered to the site at the appropriate time with the purpose of completing his work on time.<br />

This undertaking and statement must also cover all tools, instruments and labor required in order to execute the<br />

work contained in these specification. All work must be carried out by skilled, professional workers, under the<br />

supervision of a professional Engineer approved by the supervisor.<br />

11. Management of Work<br />

In order to supervise the execution of his work, the contractor will appoint an electrical engineer with<br />

experience not less than five years, who must be approved by the supervisor. The Engineer must be present on<br />

the site whenever the works constituting the subject of this contract are being carried out, and he will be the<br />

only person authorized to address the supervisor with any problem arising during work execution. The<br />

Engineer will carry out his work subject to the supervisor's instructions, and any instruction issued by the<br />

supervisor to the Engineer will bind the contractor.<br />

In any event when a certain matter has to be clarified between the supervisor and Engineer, and in the<br />

contractor's absence, the Engineer must be fully authorized to represent the contractor, and his signature will<br />

bind the contractor's.<br />

The contractor, through his Engineer, will conduct a regular work log, in which all work progress processes<br />

will be entered, as well as the supervisors’ remarks and any claims for irregular works. This work-log must be<br />

kept on the site and be available to the supervisor at all times.<br />

12. Coordination of Execution with Other Entities<br />

3


The contractor will be responsible for the execution and completion of his work in such time as proved<br />

appropriate for the progress of the over-all project, while coordinating his work with the main contractor and<br />

the other subcontractors, without causing any damages or delays in the works carried out inside the building<br />

and in the surrounding area. The contractor must ensure, particularly, that none of the junction boxes or<br />

passages/ductworks already installed be locked by other installations such as: water pipes, sewage pipes, air<br />

conditioning ducts, etc. The contractor must submit for the supervisor's approval a timetable for the execution<br />

of his work, which must be coordinated with the timetable of the main contractor.<br />

13. Familiarization with the Site Surroundings and Working Conditions<br />

The contractor must specifically state that he had visited the site and had thoroughly familiarized himself with<br />

the topography of the area and the locations of the buildings property, the access roads leading to these<br />

buildings, the locations of adjacent buildings, the working conditions on the site and buildings and any<br />

consequences which may pertain to the execution of his work. The contractor must specifically state that he<br />

had studied, familiarized himself with and thoroughly understood the specifications, drawings and bill of<br />

quantities, and that he undertakes to execute his work according to the requirements, either expressed or<br />

implied, contained within these documents.<br />

The contractor must specifically state in his proposal that he had taken into account all conditions and details<br />

pertaining to his work. No claims based on such arguments as not having been familiar with the working<br />

conditions on the site or with the requirement of having to execute the work stage-by-stage instead of<br />

continuously, or the requirement of having to co-ordinate one's work with other sub-contractors and specialists<br />

may be accepted.<br />

14. Contractor's Responsibility Warranty<br />

The contractor will be responsible to the client for the quality of the workmanship and materials he had<br />

supplied for a period of one year after the installation has been completed, tested and accepted. Any<br />

malfunctions, failures, faults and defects detected in the installation during this warranty period, or any work<br />

found to have been executed not according to the plans, specifications and instructions, will be repaired by the<br />

contractor, at his expense, within an appropriate time-interval, as determined by the engineer and supervisor.<br />

Supervision of the contractor's work and approval of it by the engineer and supervisor will not exempt the<br />

contractor from his responsibility for the execution.<br />

15. As-Built Drawings<br />

Before the final, comprehensive test is commissioned, the contractor will prepare the electrical<br />

plans/drawings of the installations as built, with clear markings of all deviations and changes carried out<br />

- with the supervisor's consent - in relation to the original plans. The contractor will submit to the<br />

supervisor two sets of updated plans, in addition to those required for submittal to the Electrical<br />

Company for the purpose of testing the installation in addition to a CD copy with all as built drawings<br />

and details.<br />

16. Installation Testing & Acceptance<br />

When the installation has been completed, a trial run will be carried out to ensure that the installation functions<br />

properly. Any malfunctions detected must be repaired to the supervisor's fullest satisfaction. Following the<br />

trial run, the contractor will commission a test by the official authority, which is to be coordinated in advance<br />

with the supervisor. The contractor will invite the official authority to test the entire installation or any part<br />

thereof, as required by the supervisor.<br />

The work shall be considered complete after it has been accepted, without reserve, by the official authority, by<br />

the supervisor, and after a trial run has been carried out. Any changes or repairs required will be carried out<br />

without delay, until the aforementioned installation has been finally accepted. The contractor will supply all the<br />

labor, means and instruments required in order to carry out the aforementioned tests and trial run. The<br />

supervisor will serve as the exclusive arbiter regarding any term or definition contained within these<br />

specifications, as well as the evaluation of the works and their compliance with these specifications.<br />

17. Cutting and Patching<br />

4


Any cutting in walls for the installation of electrical work shall be done by the contractor with extreme care, so<br />

that the structure will not be endangered. Adequate protection shall be provided to prevent damage to adjacent<br />

areas. Patching and finishing of openings shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor.<br />

18. Additional Work & Variation Orders<br />

Any additional work or variation order should be approved during the work. The client or the<br />

supervisor engineer should approve any additional work or variation order. Without such an approval<br />

the contractor will do any of these works at his expense, without meriting any additional payment.<br />

5


1. General<br />

Electrical Switchboards<br />

1. The manufacturer of the electrical switchboards must be a reputable, well-established manufacturer with at<br />

least 10 years' experience in the manufacture of electrical switchboards of similar size and power as the<br />

switchboards required for this project. The contractor must obtain the client's approval for the order of the<br />

electrical switchboards.<br />

2. The manufacturer of the electrical switchboards should be capable of providing engineering and technical<br />

support services such as consulting and maintenance for the switchboards he had manufactured.<br />

3. The electrical switchboard manufacturing plant must have a quality assurance department, which relies on<br />

written procedures and regulations, in accordance with the directives of the Local Standards Institute. A<br />

quality assurance engineer must head this department. The manufacturer would have to present a document<br />

confirming this upon the client's demand.<br />

4. The manufacturer of the electrical switchboards must submit with his bid a document listing the knowledge<br />

and technology according to which the switchboards are manufactured, as well as documents which confirm<br />

that the electrical switchboard chassis in accordance with the recommendations of its manufacturers.<br />

5. The bid will apply to the contents of these specifications, and must take into account the manufacturing,<br />

operation and testing of the switchboard at the manufacturer's plant, as well as its packing and transportation to<br />

the site, preparations for switchboard storage for a period of time in excess of one year, including wrapping<br />

with polyethylene sheets if so required by the client, and its installation at the site at such a time as determined<br />

by the supervisor, including connection of all circuits supplied by the switchboard in question.<br />

6. The manufacturer of the electrical switchboards will supply, at his own expense, all the testing equipment<br />

required in order to test the switchboards in accordance with the client's requirements.<br />

7. The contractor will bear full and exclusive responsibility for the quality of planning and manufacturing of the<br />

electrical switchboards, and the client's approval would not exempt him from this responsibility.<br />

2. Main & Secondary Electrical Switchboards–Structural Requirements:<br />

1. The electrical switchboard will consist of a cabinet made up of galvanized, 2mm thick metal sheets, with all<br />

equipment items installed behind removable panels. Any changes in the switchboard structure or layout must<br />

be authorized in advance by the supervisor, or in accordance with the bill of quantities. Structural requirements<br />

are also specified in the plans/ drawings for each switchboard.<br />

2. The electrical switchboards must be constructed/ manufactured according to a modular method, including<br />

modular assembly hardware to enable the feature addition of cabinets and equipment without difficulty. This<br />

modular manufacturing method must agree with the recommendations of the manufacturers of the electrical<br />

equipment regarding the necessary clearance between adjacent accessories and between the accessories and the<br />

switchboard chassis.<br />

3. The electrical switchboards must have an impermeability grading of IP34 according to the requirements of the<br />

German Standards VDE 0100/0660. Din 40050, and Local Standards.<br />

4. When determining the switchboard dimensions, the manufacturer must take into consideration some extra<br />

space for additional equipment (25% spare space minimum), or as specified in the drawings.<br />

5. Switchboard construction must permit convenient access to all switchboard equipment items as well as to<br />

instruments, etc., for such purposes as maintenance & service, repairs, etc. All switchboards must have internal<br />

panels unless otherwise specified in the bill of quantities or plans. All switchboard accessories must carry sign/<br />

indications in accordance with the switchboard manufacturing plans.<br />

6


6. Painting of electrical switchboards will be carried out in accordance with the General <strong>Specifications</strong> for Paint<br />

Works. The topcoat must be applied electrostatically and oven-baked. Color shade should be Oven RAL-7032,<br />

and the minimum thickness of all paint layers must be 90 microns.<br />

7. All secondary electrical switchboards will be installed inside niches enclosed by metal doors, which are to be<br />

installed as part of the construction work.<br />

8. Electrical switchboard structure must include panels to cover input and output pipes/ conduit.<br />

9. The structure of the main electrical switchboard will be suitable for installation over a channel in the floor. All<br />

switchboards must include proper floor-attachment facilities, and terminal panels in the top section and bottom<br />

section, in accordance with the location of the cable output.<br />

3. Electrical Switchboard Manufacturing Plans<br />

The drawings of the switchboard plans submitted to the contractor are principle drawings only. The contractor<br />

(manufacturer) of the electrical switchboards must prepare detailed manufacturing plans for all switchboards,<br />

in accordance with the aforementioned drawings, the type of switchboard in question and its construction<br />

method, as listed in these specifications. These manufacturing plans must include the following: -<br />

a. A single-wire electrical schematic of the electrical switchboards, including identifying data from the various<br />

equipment items.<br />

b. A diagram of the switchboard with its doors/ panels closed, and in a separate diagram, an outline of the<br />

switchboard without its doors/ panels.<br />

c. Structural cross-sections of the switchboard from all sides, including detailed description of its structural<br />

elements (e.g. metal profile type and thickness, method of connection between the sheet-metal covers and the<br />

profiles, welding method, etc.).<br />

d. A diagram of the routing of the main and secondary bus bars, main bus-bar junctions, and the reinforcing<br />

hardware for the main and secondary bus-bars.<br />

e. An accurate, detailed diagram, including dimensions, of the installation and locations of all equipment items on<br />

the switchboard.<br />

f. A full list of accessories, including: the name of the manufacturer and his representative in Palestine or Israel,<br />

part numbers of all equipment items plus their technical characteristics (e.g. breaking capacity, rated current,<br />

physical dimensions, rated voltage/ frequency, disruption and insulation voltages).<br />

Whenever possible, the manufacturer should accompany the plans with original catalogues and technical<br />

information as issued by the original manufacturer of the equipment, for all equipment types and items he<br />

intends to use.<br />

g. Detailed cross-sections of the bus bars, the type of insulators on which they are installed, and the clearances<br />

between them (the manufacturer should accompany the plans with catalogues of the insulators). The technical<br />

data for the cross-sections of the bus bars and insulators will be determined by the manufacturer in accordance<br />

with the following criteria:<br />

1. Tables of bus-bar cross-sections and spatial arrangement as a function of operating current and environment<br />

temperature. The tables must be obtained from the manufacturer of the accessories installed in the<br />

switchboard, or according to DIN 43671.<br />

2. Tables or calculations of the clearances between the insulators holding the bus bars as a function of the shortcircuit<br />

current.<br />

h. Switchboard impermeability data according to the IP classification, in accordance with the requirements<br />

contained in the specifications, plans or bill of quantities.<br />

7


i. The plans must include the manufacturer's specifications for the painting process of the switchboard chassis,<br />

including step-by-step instructions for preparing the switchboards prior to the actual painting.<br />

4. Approval of the Manufacturing Plans<br />

The plans specified in paragraph 3 above must be submitted by the contractor for reviewing and approval by<br />

the planner. Only after the plans have been approved and all modifications and updates (if such had been<br />

required) have been introduced may the contractor begin the actual manufacturing of the switchboards. Any<br />

plans submitted for authorization with any of the details listed in paragraph 3 above missing will be returned to<br />

the contractor without having been reviewed or authorized, and the contractor will be held responsible for any<br />

delays in the work process.<br />

5. Electrical Switchboard Testing<br />

a. The manufacturer of the electrical switchboards will invite the planner, through the supervisor, to oversee the<br />

manufacturing of the switchboards at the following stages:<br />

1) Following completion of the switchboard frames and prior to painting of same.<br />

2) Following completion of the final painting.<br />

3) Following assembly of the bus bars and accessories.<br />

4) Following completion of the wiring for the switchboards and all accessories.<br />

In the event that the switchboard manufacturer had used standards, pre-fabricated cabinets manufactured by an<br />

approved manufacturer, and this has been confirmed and approved by the planner, stages 1) and 2) above may<br />

be waived.<br />

Only after each of the execution stages listed above has been approved may the manufacturer proceed with the<br />

switchboard manufacturing process.<br />

b. When the manufacturing of the switchboards at the plant has been completed, the manufacturer will invite the<br />

planner, through the supervisor, to test the switchboards at the plant. Only after the planner has carried out a<br />

test and issued a written authorization may the contractor remove the switchboards from the manufacturer's<br />

plant and transfer them to the site.<br />

In any case, the aforementioned authorization may not be regarded as a final acceptance of the switchboards.<br />

The final acceptance will take place on the site, in the presence of the client, the supervisor and the contractor,<br />

after the switchboards have been installed at the site, connected to the users and activated.<br />

6. Bus Bars<br />

a. The switchboards will contain bus bars for phases R, S, T, neutral and ground, without paint. These bus bars<br />

shall be made of copper, and their cross-section must be compatible, thermally and mechanically, with the<br />

short-circuit currents specified in the plans, and in any case not less than 15KA.<br />

b. The electrical switchboards must be constructed without any cables, and all connections between the main bus<br />

bars and equipment items must be done through flexible, insulated secondary bus bars, attached to the<br />

switchboard chassis. The cross-section of the neutral bus bar must be the same as the cross - section of the<br />

phase bus bar.<br />

c. Connection between main bus bars and secondary bus bars must be done by means of suitable terminals,<br />

without drilling any holes through the bus bars.<br />

d. Miniature automatic circuit breakers for up to 63 A will be connected to the bus bars in groups by means of<br />

terminal strips (blocks).<br />

e. In cases of cable outputs from the top and bottom sections of the switchboard, neutral and ground bus bars will<br />

be installed at the top section as well as at the bottom section of the switchboard.<br />

8


f. Multi-layer plastic signs carrying the appropriate written identification will be installed over the bus bars.<br />

7. Ground & Neutral Bus Bars and Terminal Panels<br />

Each electrical switchboard will include a grounding bus-bar which would provide grounding connections for<br />

the various circuits, as well as terminals for the grounding lead which supplies the switchboards or grounds it<br />

to a metal fixture.<br />

Ditto for the neutral bus bar and terminals.<br />

The switchboard is to include also a "terminal and connection box/panel", which should enable convenient<br />

access to the terminals, and a profile for cable attachment. With each cable, conductor or wire connected to the<br />

terminals, some excess must be provided by forming a length of the cable or wire into a loop.<br />

8. Grounding<br />

a. Grounding of the switchboard chassis will be affected by welding a galvanized stud inside the switchboard, to<br />

which a grounding lead from the grounding bus bar of the switchboard will be connected by means of a cable<br />

shoes.<br />

b. Galvanic continuity must be ensured for all parts of the switchboards. In switchboards with doors a grounding<br />

bridge must be established between the switchboard chassis and the doors by means of a flexible grounding<br />

lead and cable shoes.<br />

c. In switchboards consisting of integrated modules, a grounding stud will be connected as described in subparagraph<br />

(a) above to each module separately, in order to obtain a galvanic continuity between all modules.<br />

9. Accessories<br />

All switchboard accessories must withstand a short-circuit current of 15,000 Amperes minimum, per<br />

VDE 0641/0660, unless otherwise specified. Each accessory must carry a marking of the standard to<br />

which it conforms (approved standards: IEC, VDE and UL). All connection terminals for the various<br />

accessories must be protected against contact with live parts in accordance with VDE 106, Part 100.<br />

The switchboard accessories must be of the following types and models, and must conform to the instructions<br />

listed below: -<br />

a. "KLOCKNER-MOELLER", “MERLIN-GERIN“, "SIEMENS", "TELEMECANIQUE", or “GE”.<br />

b. Functionally equivalent accessories in all switchboards must be of the same make. Installation of functionallyequivalent<br />

accessories of different makes will not be allowed.<br />

c. Rotary switches will be as made by "KLOCKNER-MOELLER",“GE” or equivalent, of the on-load<br />

disconnected type, with a zero position. Rotary switches must conform to VDE 0660, 0113 regarding their<br />

breaking capacity, as well as to the insulating characteristics specified in VDE 0110, class "C".<br />

d. All indication lamps will be of the incandescent type, 220 Volts, with an E-14 type base and an arrangement<br />

for voltage reduction to 75% of the lamp's rated voltage by means of an integral resistor.<br />

e. Miniature automatic circuit breakers for currents up to 63 A will be as made by “MERLIN-GERIN”,<br />

"SIEMENS", "KLOCKNER-MOELLER", with tripping characteristic "G", unless otherwise specified in the<br />

plans. All automatic circuit breakers must conform to VDE 0110,0641, 0660, and must withstand a short<br />

circuit current of 10000 Amperes minimum.<br />

f. Three-phase automatic circuit breakers for currents in excess of 63 A must have an adjustable magnetic and<br />

thermal current, and a facility for the connection of auxiliary contacts, trip coil, etc.<br />

g. Earth-leakage relays will be as made by “MERLIN-GERIN”, "SIEMENS", "KLOCKNER MOELLER", and<br />

must conform to VDE 0664.<br />

9


h. Contactors will be as made by "TELEMECANIQUE" or "KLOCKNER-MOELLER" or “GE”, and must<br />

conform to VDE 0660/1 and to AC2-class operating conditions.<br />

i. Built-in measuring instruments (gauges) must be 96x96 mm or 72x72 mm, as required by the plans and/or the<br />

bills of quantities.<br />

All built-in measuring instruments (gauges) must be screened against electromagnetic induction, with an<br />

accuracy rate of 1.5%, and protected against short-circuit in the measured line.<br />

j. Terminals will be made of a thermoplastic material, with a screw and pressure clamp, such as made by<br />

"PHOENIX”, of the type suitable for installation on "DIN"-type rails, for operating voltage of 500 Volts and<br />

with "C"-class insulation characteristics.<br />

k. When selecting the equipment and the method for installing it on the switchboard, the contractor must take into<br />

consideration an operating temperature of 40 degrees centigrade. All equipment items must conform to DIN<br />

40040 regarding environmental and climatic conditions.<br />

10. Terminals<br />

All connections between the various accessories of the switchboard and the installation must be arranged by<br />

means of terminal strips, with indication tags and numerated bus-bars for the neutral and ground.<br />

All terminals must be of the rail-mounted (terminal strip) type.<br />

11. Signing<br />

a. The contractor must arrange for the proper signing of all circuits, and match all signs with the installation in its<br />

complete state. Multi-layer plastic signs will be attached to the front of the switchboard and inside it by means<br />

of screws and in such a manner as to ensure the unequivocal identification of all components even when the<br />

protective covers have been removed. The signs will be installed after the switchboard has been painted for the<br />

second time. Signs will also be installed on the doors enclosing the niches in which electrical switchboards<br />

had been installed.<br />

b. Color shades for switchboard signing will be as follows:<br />

1. Main cable inputs - white over a red background.<br />

2. Outputs & accessories - white over a black background.<br />

In addition to the aforementioned color shades, signs in different color combinations will also be<br />

prepared in order to distinguish specific areas of the switchboard. These color combinations will be coordinated<br />

with the manufacturer of the electrical switchboards before any of the circuits and accessories<br />

have been sign-posted.<br />

c. At the top part of the switchboard, a sign will be installed which would indicate the switchboard name<br />

(designation), number and supply source. Another sign will be installed on the side of the switchboard, which<br />

would contain the name, address and telephone number of the switchboard manufacturer.<br />

12. Switchboard Schematics<br />

Each switchboard will contain a pouch with a drawing, which is to include an electrical schematic and<br />

the switchboard structural plan.<br />

13. Proper Location<br />

The contractor must check the locations where the switchboards are to be installed. He must also ensure<br />

that the switchboards are compatible with the building and with the locations where they are to be<br />

installed.<br />

10


Installations in the Building<br />

1. Piping / Cable Conduits<br />

1. Conduits shall be installed for all wires and cables except where otherwise stated or directed. The conduits shall<br />

be PVC pipe of the thinner type (Merikaf) or similar under plaster.<br />

2. Conduits of a fireproof plastic type should be used whenever exposed installations are used or inside acoustic<br />

ceiling. And it shall be securely fastened in place by means of galvanized metal profile sections.<br />

3. No conduits used should have an internal diameter less than 13mm. The conductor’s area within the conduit<br />

should not exceed 50% of the area of the conduit.<br />

4. The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the conduits are so laid that the water cannot infiltrate or<br />

accumulate at any point.<br />

5. The contractor shall be responsible to ensure that placing of the conduit is done prior to pouring of concrete<br />

without delaying the concrete work.<br />

6. In conduit installation the contractor should make all his effort to run all the pipes in horizontal or vertical lines<br />

and not inclined and to be at the same level from the floor in all rooms.<br />

7. The conduits should have at least covered of 2cm of plaster or concrete.<br />

8. Separate conduits have to be used for different electrical systems of different voltage.<br />

9. Conduits between any two-connection boxes have to be of one piece with no connection in the pipes.<br />

10. Where finish wall surfaces are to be plastered, the Electrical Contractor shall cooperate with the general<br />

contractor during construction of these walls and use care in the installation of all conduits and boxes so that<br />

wall surfaces will have a finished appearance.<br />

11. Conduits shall be installed to requirements of structure and to requirements of all other work on the project.<br />

Conduits shall be installed to clear all openings, depressions, pipes, ducts, reinforcing steel, etc. and conduit set<br />

in forms for concrete structure shall be installed in a manner that installation will not affect the strength of the<br />

structure.<br />

12. All conduits have to be approved by local standards.<br />

13. All piping/ cable conduit installations must be co-ordinated with the installation of the air-conditioning piping<br />

and ductwork, water pipes, sewage pipe, etc.<br />

14. For exposed installations on walls, heavy, rigid PVC, self-extinguishing type piping/ cable conduit shall be<br />

used<br />

2. Pull Boxes and Connection Boxes<br />

1. The contractor has to make his best to use the minimum number of these boxes.<br />

2. Connection boxes should be of the same material as that of the conduits.<br />

3. Pull boxes should be of steel or plastic according to the engineer instructions.<br />

4. All boxes should be covered.<br />

5. Installed connectors should be used in all the connections inside the boxes.<br />

6. Cable of different voltages should not be drawn or connected in the same connection boxes.<br />

3. Switches<br />

1. Outlet boxes for switches are to be fixed 140cm above finished floor level and 12cm horizontally from the<br />

outside edge of the nearest door.<br />

2. Switches should be of 10Amp. With different signs for emergency switches if used.<br />

3. Switches should be of waterproof type GEWISS or equivalent for the bathrooms and where other else shown.<br />

4. All switches should be all insulated flush of GEWISS or equivalent.<br />

5. Switches shall be wired with the phase lines only.<br />

6. Switch panels shall have a similar assembly to switches and it should be group mounted in a common box if<br />

possible. Otherwise it has to be group mounted in aluminum or stainless steel cover to the approval of the<br />

engineer.<br />

4. Wires & Cables<br />

1. All wires and cables, except where otherwise stated should have a soft copper core, refined and tinned, with an<br />

electric conductivity of not less than 98%. The core shall be insulated with rubber with braid for 750 volts<br />

service.<br />

11


2. The contractor prior to commencement of the work should submit samples of cabling and wiring proposed by<br />

the designer. These must comply with the requirements of the IEE and the local standards to ensure a constant<br />

voltage in every part of the building.<br />

3. All wires are to be standard. (For power and lighting, the neutral wire shall be different in color from and the<br />

phase wires).<br />

4. All wires shall be run on conduit and shall be continuous between outlets and boxes. At least 20cm of wire<br />

shall be left at outlets for fixture connections.<br />

5. Where size is shown on drawings, or specified it shall be the same size throughout the circuit.<br />

6. Wiring inside panel boards shall neat and well arranged, using appropriate lugs for terminals and connection<br />

of conductors.<br />

7. Joints in the cables or wires are not allowed inside the conduits.<br />

8. Wires are to be fixed to boards with an appliance ensuring perfect electrical contact, to the approval of<br />

Electrical Engineer.<br />

9. Cable shoes have to be used for wires or cables 6mm2 or above.<br />

10. All boxes and distribution boards have to be carefully cleaned from plaster and other foreign material before<br />

drawing any electric wires or cables.<br />

11. All the cables should be of the NYY type 5 or 4 cores, 11000 volt, plain annealed high conductivity copper<br />

wire conductors PVC sheathed.<br />

12. Cable terminations should be through brass glands. Glands should be complete with brass earth tags and steel<br />

lock nuts.<br />

13. Cable connections at both ends should be through cable shoes.<br />

14. Cables should be covered with soft sand, concrete slabs and special warning tape.<br />

5. Painting<br />

All metal elements, including pipes, supports, reinforcement hardware, brackets, etc., shall be painted<br />

with one layer of anti-corrosive Zinc-Chromate primer, followed by two layers of oven-backed topcoat,<br />

in the color shade specified. Before painting, all metal elements must be cleaned of any dirt, rust, etc.<br />

6. Cable & Piping/ Conduit Reinforcing Hardware<br />

All reinforcing hardware profiles shall be type Z20N2 as manufactured by "ASHDOD ELECTRO-<br />

MECHANICS" or equivalent, with 30mm sides. All profiles must be galvanized, and shall be attached<br />

to ceiling and/or walls by means of Philips-head screws. The above profiles should be included in the<br />

regular prices for the installation of the cables or piping.<br />

7. Preparatory Work for Electrical (Mains) & Telephone Supplies<br />

The contractor shall be charged with the responsibility for finding out the manner and details concerning the<br />

supply of mains electrical power by the Electrical Co. as well as the supply of telephone lines by the Pal Tel<br />

Co. The contractor shall make all necessary preparations for this purpose in due time, in co-ordination with the<br />

Electrical Co. and the Pal Tel Co. The contractor would also have to co-ordinate the works having to do with<br />

crossing of the road or any other public passageways with the supervisor and the client representative and/or<br />

the local Municipality (excavation permits, etc.).<br />

8. Location of Electrical Installation Elements<br />

Before the actual execution of his work, the contractor must obtain from the supervisor a final approval<br />

for the accurate locations (measurements and heights) of such accessories as socket housings, lighting<br />

switches, telephone sockets and lighting fixture outlets. In addition, the contractor must obtain an<br />

approval for the manner in which adjacent or multiple items are to be installed. The measurements<br />

indicated in the drawings (according to the relevant scale) must not be relied upon without the<br />

supervisor's approval.<br />

The contractor must be assisted by the architectural room-layout drawings which indicate the locations of the<br />

various electrical and communications accessories, as well as by the air-conditioning and sanitary installation<br />

drawings, in order to establish and verify the accurate locations for the installation of all electrical accessories<br />

as well as ductwork and piping passages.<br />

9. Accessories<br />

12


a. Bakelite accessories - switches, socket housings, push buttons, telephone sockets, etc. shall be as<br />

manufactured by GEWISS 20 Euro system range-modular components, and GEWISS 22-24 Euro system<br />

range plates, supports.<br />

b. In places where multiple electrical accessories (e.g. socket housings, lighting switches, etc.) are to be installed<br />

side-by-side, they shall be mounted on common frames and covers in a "composite" structure, with the<br />

contractor observing the proper separation between circuits, as prescribed by the Electricity Act.<br />

c. Metal accessories - in installations where armored accessories are used, all socket housings must feature a<br />

spring-loaded or screw-on (threaded) type cover.<br />

d. All electrical and communications accessories shall be attached to their related junction boxes by means of<br />

screws, in order to prevent these accessories from being pulled loose when plugs, etc. are being pulled out.<br />

e. All terminal boxes shall have covers attached to the box by means of screws.<br />

10. Sleeves and Piping/ Conduit Passing Through Concrete Floors on Structural Walls:<br />

a. Sleeves through which electrical and telephone cables are inserted shall be fabricated from pipes, as described<br />

in the drawings.<br />

b. The sleeves shall be laid in the ground before the concrete floor is cast, in accordance with the location and<br />

routing described in the drawings.<br />

c. Installation of sleeves prior to concrete casting shall necessitate the preparation of frames, brackets and<br />

reinforcement hardware for fixing the sleeve in place.<br />

d. Sleeves extending outside of the building shall be installed with a downward, outward gradient, to prevent<br />

water penetration.<br />

e. After the cables have been inserted through the sleeve, the sleeve ends shall be sealed against moisture using<br />

the appropriate sealant.<br />

11. Cable Ducts<br />

a. Plastic cable ducts shall be of the self-extinguishing materials.<br />

b. All ducts shall be installed horizontally using suitable reinforcing hardware, made up of 1 mm thick galvanized<br />

sheet metal, or attached to the ceiling by means of hangers at 40 cm intervals.<br />

c. Inside the ducts, serrated profiles shall be installed for cable routing, by means of plastic clamps only.<br />

d. Metal cable ducts shall be made up of 1.5mm thick sheet metal, and attached to the ceiling, wall or on the roof<br />

by means of hangers, at 60cm intervals. All hangers and reinforcing hardware should be included in the price<br />

of the duct. The reinforcement specifications for each duct type must be approved prior to execution.<br />

e. Fireproof partitions shall be installed in all enclosed cable conduits, to prevent the possibility of fire spreading<br />

through the passages/ conduit from one wing of the building to another.<br />

Partition installation shall be executed as specified in paragraph 3.12 below.<br />

f. Trellis trays (mesh-type ducts) shall be made of round section, 5 mm diameter steel rods. All trays must be<br />

galvanized with hot Zinc after welding. All changes in duct direction and all bends shall be facilitated by<br />

means of standard bending. Separate ductwork sections shall be attached together by means of standard joints,<br />

as manufactured by the manufacturer of the ductwork elements.<br />

The ducts shall be installed on ceiling or walls by means of special hangers, at 60 cm intervals maximum. The<br />

cost of all hangers and reinforcing hardware should be included in the price of ductwork, and would not merit<br />

any separate payment. The final approval of the planner and supervisor must be obtained for all ductwork<br />

installation and reinforcement specifications prior to execution.<br />

13


g. All metallic cable conduits must be grounded in accordance with the electricity Act.<br />

12. Sealing of Passages for Electrical & Communication Cables<br />

a. After all electrical and communication cables have been installed; all openings through which cables had been<br />

inserted must be sealed. This requirement applies to horizontal passages through walls as well as to vertical<br />

passages between floors.<br />

b. Sealing materials and method shall be such as KBS by GRUNAU, and must meet the requirements of at least<br />

one of the following standards: DIN 41 02, UL 263, UL 1479, NFPA 251, BS 476.<br />

c. Sealant must be water-resistant and water weatherproof.<br />

Sealant must be flexible enough to enable the insertion of additional cables through the passage, after it had<br />

been sealed.<br />

d. In any event, the sealant must not affect the thermal and electrical conductivity characteristics of the cable<br />

insulation.<br />

e. Sealing to prevent the passage of fire and smoke shall be executed so that it may retain its resistance<br />

characteristics for 180 minutes minimum.<br />

f. Upon contact with fire, the sealant must not emit toxic fumes. Toxicity level shall conform to Local Standard,<br />

and must meet toxicity rating, which is not considered fatal for personnel.<br />

g. Sealing is to be executed as follows: -<br />

1) All openings shall be sealed by 60mm thick boards of compressed rock wool, with a density of 160kg/ sq.m,<br />

coated on both sides with a uniform, 1.5 mm thick layer of "FLAMMASTIK”. Board dimensions shall match<br />

the dimensions of the openings, plus 3 mm at both directions to allow for pressure during installation.<br />

2) Before placing the rock-wool boards, a layer of KBS sealant shall be applied to the entire contact area between<br />

the boards and the wall and between the boards and cables.<br />

3) After the boards have been installed, all points which had not been sealed shall be sealed using bulk rock wool,<br />

and an additional coating of KBS sealant.<br />

4) In addition, a 30-mm wide strip around the opening should be coated with FLAMMASTIK.<br />

5) After the passage has been perfectly sealed, FLAMMASTIK shall be applied or sprayed over the cables on<br />

both sides of the passage, to a distance of 50 cm from it. Thickness of the coating layer after drying must be<br />

about 2.5-mm minimum.<br />

13. Marking & Signing<br />

a. In addition to the prescriptions in this chapter of the general specifications, special markings and signs shall be<br />

required for this project, due to the fact that it involves a public installation.<br />

b. Electrical switchboards and socket housings: a sign shall be attached to the front of each electrical switchboard,<br />

with a breakdown of the switchboard code, number an supply source. All switchboard accessories and wiring<br />

shall be clearly marked, and all markings must be identical to the descriptions in the drawings, including<br />

operating instructions and warning signs.<br />

c. Lighting fixtures: two signs shall be attached to each lighting fixture, one indicating its serial number, and the<br />

other indicating the number of the electrical circuit supplying it. All incandescent lighting fixtures shall carry<br />

signs indicating the maximum allowable bulb wattage, as required.<br />

d. Lighting switches: each switch shall be identified by the serial number of the circuit to which it belongs.<br />

Also, a sign indicating the lighting fixtures it controls shall be installed next to it.<br />

14


e. Cables: the serial numbers of all cables shall be marked on identification discs or "sandwich" type signs<br />

attached to the cables at their tapping (branch-off) points, with all junction boxes marked as well, or with<br />

signs placed at 10 m intervals along the entire length of the cable in question (whichever is shorter).<br />

Wherever cables are installed inside conduit/ ductwork, an identification sign shall be attached to the conduit/<br />

duct with the serial numbers of all cables installed inside that conduit/ duct, their cross-sections and functions.<br />

Markings shall be placed at 10m intervals along cable at electrical switchboard inlets and in passage pits must<br />

be identified by signs.<br />

f. All signs shall be of the "sandwich" type, in the colors specified by the supervisor prior to manufacturing of<br />

the signs.<br />

g. Electrical cabinets: signs conforming to the fire department's standards, with information such as "Main<br />

electrical circuit breaker", etc., or any other message, as required, shall be installed on the doors of the<br />

electrical cabinets. Sign finishing shall be co-ordinated with the architect. All communication cabinets shall<br />

be identified by the appropriate signs as required.<br />

h. All sign costs should be included in the regular unit price of the electrical<br />

works, and would merit no separate payment whatsoever<br />

Preparation for Communication & Signaling Systems<br />

The building in question is to include a fire-detection & alarm system, TV system, a public address system,<br />

Intercom system, as well as telephone systems; the electrical works are to include only the preparations<br />

required for the installation of these systems.<br />

In order to facilitate the installation of the aforementioned systems, communication cabinets are to be<br />

installed in accordance with the principle instructions included in the drawings.<br />

All preparatory outlets for the aforementioned systems must be marked with signs and other identifying<br />

measures.<br />

1. Preparatory Works for the Installation of Telephone Systems<br />

a. These preparatory works include underground piping for the main telephone input connection for the<br />

building, with a 8mm diameter Nylon drawstring.<br />

b. All communications cabinets on the floors shall incorporate primary or secondary telephone tapping boxes<br />

(CORONAS).<br />

c. Each telephone point must consist of a 16mm diameter, heavy, bendable, self-extinguishing type pipe with a<br />

2x2x0.5 telephone cable as made by “Cable Zion”, “Teldor“, or “Cvalim“ drawn inside the conduit. The<br />

outlet accessory is to consist of a fixed telephone socket, such as manufactured by "Gewiss" 20 Eurosystem<br />

range type.<br />

d. All telephone piping works must be carried out in accordance with applicable standards and the requirements<br />

of the PALTEL Co. after the work has been completed. The contractor must co-ordinate the necessary<br />

supervision and obtain the approval from the regional office of the PALTEL Co.<br />

2. Preparatory Works for the Installation of a Public-Address System<br />

a. All communications cabinets shall incorporate tapping boxes for a public -address system.<br />

b. Each public-address point must consist of a 16mm diameter, heavy, bendable, self-extinguishing type pipe<br />

with a 2mm diameter Nylon drawstring, installed under the plastering and/or a duct leading from the publicaddress<br />

section of the communications cabinet to the public-address point, All public-address points must<br />

terminate with an under-plaster or over-plaster type junction box, as required.<br />

15


3. Preparatory Works for the Installation of a Fire-Detection & Alarm System<br />

a<br />

All communications cabinets shall incorporate tapping boxes for a fire detection & alarm system.<br />

b. Each preparatory point for the fire detection & alarm system must consist of a 16 mm diameter, heavy,<br />

bendable, self-extinguishing type pipe with a 2 mm diameter Nylon drawstring, installed under the plastering<br />

and /or a duct leading from the fire detection system section of the communications cabinet to the terminal<br />

point. All fire detection & alarm points must terminate with an under-plaster or over plaster type junction box,<br />

as required.<br />

4. Preparatory Works for The Installation of A TV Antenna System (M.A.T.V)<br />

a. All communications cabinets shall incorporate tapping boxes for a TV antenna system.<br />

b. Each TV antenna connection point must consist of a 23 mm diameter, heavy, bendable, self-extinguishing<br />

type with RG6 TV cable, installed under the plastering and/or a duct leading from the TV antenna section of<br />

the communications cabinet to the terminal point. All TV antenna points must terminate with an under-plaster<br />

type junction box, for the installation of a TV antenna socket.<br />

c. In addition, an outlet to the roof shall be facilitated, and all preparations for routing communication cables to<br />

the TV antenna installed on the roof shall be carried out in accordance with the drawings.<br />

5. Preparatory Works for the Installation of a Computer Communication Network System<br />

a. All communications cabinets shall incorporate tapping boxes for a computer communication (Network)<br />

system.<br />

b. Each computer communication point must consist of a 16 mm diameter, heavy, bendable, self-extinguishing<br />

type with suitable computer STP level 5 twisted pair cable, installed under the plastering and/or a duct leading<br />

from the computer communication section of the communications cabinet to the terminal point. All computer<br />

communication points must terminate with an under-plaster type junction box.<br />

6. Preparatory Works for the Installation of an Intercom System<br />

a. All communications cabinets shall incorporate tapping boxes for a Intercom System.<br />

b. Each Intercom system point must consist of a 16 mm diameter, heavy, bendable, self-extinguishing type with<br />

a 2 mm diameter Nylon drawstring, installed under the plastering and/or a duct leading from the intercom<br />

section of the communications cabinet to the terminal point. All Intercom points must terminate with an<br />

under-plaster type junction box.<br />

7. Preparatory Works for the Installation of a Nurse Calling System<br />

a. All communications cabinets shall incorporate tapping boxes for a Nurse Calling System.<br />

b. Each Nurse Calling System point must consist of a 16 mm diameter, heavy, bendable, self-extinguishing type<br />

with a 2 mm diameter Nylon drawstring, installed under the plastering and/or a duct leading from the<br />

intercom section of the communications cabinet to the terminal point. All Nurse Calling Points must terminate<br />

with an under-plaster type junction box.<br />

1. General<br />

Lighting Fixtures<br />

a. Lighting fixtures in the building shall include fixtures for general-purpose lighting, emergency lighting, and<br />

external (outdoor) lighting.<br />

b. All lighting fixtures must conform to Local standard or to equivalent European standards.<br />

16


c. Installation of equipment items inside lighting fixtures shall be carried out so as to prevent any vibrations (by<br />

means of vibration dampers) or humming. Also, all contacts and connections must be secured against<br />

loosening due to vibrations.<br />

d. All lighting fixtures must be easily accessible and removable for equipment replacement purposes, by a single<br />

person, without the use of screwdrivers or any other tools.<br />

e. All sockets for incandescent lamps/bulbs must be made of porcelain.<br />

f. A junction and/or connections box must be installed for each lighting fixture. This also applies to lighting<br />

fixtures recessed into walls or ceilings.<br />

g. Lighting fixtures installed where there are trusses must be fitted on special cross beams fastened along each<br />

room in the proper direction so as to fix the light fixtures on them, these cross beams shall be included in the<br />

regular price for the light fixtures, and shall not merit any separate payment.<br />

h. Co-ordination of installation of recessed lighting fixtures in concrete ceilings or steel structural elements:<br />

The contractor shall be charged with the responsibility for the proper installation of all lighting fixtures<br />

recessed into ceilings. The contractor shall be charged with the responsibility for the integrity of the ceiling,<br />

as well as for the full co-ordination between the various sub-contractors. Also, separate reinforcing elements<br />

must be installed for tall lighting fixtures attached to metal structural elements, in accordance with the detail<br />

as approved by the supervisor. These reinforcing elements must be included in the lighting fixture installation<br />

price.<br />

i. Lighting fixtures to be supplied by the client:<br />

Should this be required, the contractor shall install lighting fixtures supplied by the client. In this case, the<br />

contractor shall be paid only for the installation of the lighting fixtures, which is to include all operations and<br />

materials required for the installation and proper operation of the lighting fixtures in question. The contractor<br />

shall be charged with the responsibility for the integrity and serviceability of these lighting fixtures from the<br />

moment he has taken delivery of them. The contractor must sign a receipt for taking delivery of these lighting<br />

fixtures, and shall arrange for proper storage, security and maintenance for the lighting fixtures until the<br />

moment of installation. Any defaults/malfunctions detected in these lighting fixtures after and /or prior to<br />

installation shall be regarded as the contractor's responsibility.<br />

2. General Purpose Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures<br />

a. All lighting fixtures be constructed so as to enable connection of leads after installation, with convenient<br />

access to terminals and other equipment items by removal of front cover, without having to remove the<br />

lighting fixtures itself.<br />

b. All lighting fixtures must be supplied with all auxiliary equipment and tubes.<br />

c. All lamp sockets must be of the spring-loaded type.<br />

d. Ballast's for fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be with a five-year warranty and a capacitor to improve the<br />

power factor. Also, for specialized lighting fixtures, ballasts may be installed in accordance with the<br />

manufacturers recommendations or specific requirements.<br />

e. All starters for fluorescent lamps shall be of the electronic type.<br />

f. Lighting fixtures with PL type miniature fluorescent lamps shall be round, rectangular or square, made of<br />

plastic, with a polycarbonate base and prismatic or opal polycarbonate cover, as specified in the Bills of<br />

Quantities.<br />

Also, these lighting fixtures must include a built-in reflector and suitable ballast, such as manufactured by<br />

"OSRAM" as well as terminals for lead connection.<br />

g. Fluorescent Lamps /Tubes<br />

17


1) All fluorescent tubes shall have a diameter of 26mm,such as “LUMILUX Daylight No.11", as manufactured by<br />

"OSRAM", with a wattage of 18, 36 or 58 Watts, and a luminous flux of 1300, 3250, and 5200 Lumens,<br />

respectively, after 100 hours of operation, or such as "Polylux" , as manufactured by 'THORN".<br />

2) Miniature PL-type fluorescent lamps shall be such as model "DULUX-S" as manufactured by 'OSRAM”, light<br />

shade No. 21, with a wattage of 9 or 11 Watts, and a luminous flux of 600 or 900 Lumens, respectively, or<br />

such as "PL" as manufactured by "PHILIPS", light shade No.`84.<br />

h. Louvers for Fluorescent Lamps/Tubes (When Required)<br />

All louvers must be non-yellowing, made with a special anti-yellowing agent. The contractor must guarantee<br />

all louvers for a period of two years.<br />

3. Emergency Lighting Fixtures<br />

a. 220 Volts Emergency Lighting Fixtures<br />

220 volts emergency lighting fixtures shall include a battery designed for 1.5 hours of operation, fluorescent,<br />

20 or 8 Watts, as required. Emergency lamps should turn on automatically in any event of a power breakdown,<br />

and turn off automatically as soon as power supply has been resumed. All lamps must feature an 'EXIT' sign,<br />

as required by fire department regulations.<br />

b. Dual Purpose 220 Volts Emergency Lighting Fixtures<br />

These lighting fixtures shall be fluorescent, of the type specified in the Bill of Quantities, and shall feature an<br />

automatic turn-on system for power breakdowns, as described above, also with a buttery designed for 1.5 hours<br />

of operation.<br />

4. Special Conditions for Supply of Light Fixtures<br />

a. A catalogue of fixtures to be supplied should be submitted by the contractor for approval before ordering any<br />

fixture pointing in the catalogue to the specific fixture offered.<br />

b. The fixtures supplied should comply with the relevant catalogues and specifications mentioned in the Bill of<br />

Quantities. The contractor will be totally responsible in case of discrepancy with these catalogues and<br />

specifications.<br />

c. In the selection of manufacturers and / or products preference shall be given to products specified in the bill of<br />

quantities by manufacturer and code number.<br />

d. Fixtures of similar construction, appearance, dimensions and maintenance features and equal in efficiency,<br />

distribution, brightness and degree of protection (IP) shall be accepted as approved equivalents. Fixtures<br />

failing in any of these respects will not be approved.<br />

e. The contractor is totally responsible for the supply of the lighting fixtures with all its needed fixing<br />

accessories whether to be fixed on ceiling on truss structural elements or on walls and these accessories are<br />

considered to be included in his offer.<br />

f. Each fixture must be equipped with the proper number of new lamps of the correct size, all in good operating<br />

conditions and as manufactured by “ OSRAM “. The price of these lamps is included in the unit rate of the<br />

lighting fixture.<br />

g. Ballast’s for fluorescent lighting fixtures must be with a five-year warranty and a capacitor to improve the<br />

power factor.<br />

h. All starters for fluorescent lamps shall be of the electronic type.<br />

18


Intercom System<br />

1. General Description<br />

The work in question is to be executed in the hospital building, and is to include the supply and<br />

installation of a complete Intercom system, with all parts and accessories therefore, in accordance with the<br />

instructions of the specifications, the drawings and the Bills of Quantities.<br />

2. General Directives for Execution<br />

1. Installation of Accessories<br />

a. All equipment items shall be installed in their proper locations in accordance with the drawings. Most<br />

equipment items shall be installed under the plastering, and in accordance with the instructions included in<br />

the drawings.<br />

b. The contractor must obtain the supervisor and planner's approval for the precise location of each accessory<br />

prior to execution. He should also obtain their approval for the reinforcing and installation methods he<br />

intends to use.<br />

2. Wiring<br />

a. All wiring shall be carried out using multiple-wire cables, as specified in the wiring diagrams, the supply<br />

schematics, and in accordance with the instructions issued by the equipment suppliers.<br />

b. Cables shall be routed through the piping and communication ducts installed during the construction stage,<br />

in accordance with the drawings.<br />

3. Marking and Identification<br />

a. Identification and instruction signs shall be installed next to all system accessories, in accordance with the<br />

requirements of the specifications and drawings.<br />

b. All signs shall be "sandwich" type.<br />

c. The costs of all signs shall be included in the regular unit prices, and will merit no separate payment.<br />

4. System Testing and Commissioning<br />

The system shall be tested and operated for a trial run, and will only be delivered to the client after it has<br />

been operated, tested and completed to the clients fullest satisfaction.<br />

Upon delivery, the contractor must supply 3 sets of manuals, which are to cover the equipment items<br />

installed and supplied (catalogues, etc.), as well as an "As-Made wiring diagram for the system.<br />

5. Equipment and Accessories<br />

a. All system parts, such as the Intercom units installed in the various offices and near entrance doors,<br />

electrical locks, power-supply units, switching relays, etc., must be of the highest quality and must also<br />

conform to applicable standards.<br />

b. The equipment suppliers must be capable of supplying spare parts and repair services for a minimum<br />

period of 10 years from the date of installation.<br />

c. The types and specifications of all equipment items, including brochures and samples must be submitted<br />

to the client and planner's approval prior to installation.<br />

d. The Intercom system and accessories shall be as manufactured by AIPHONE OR EQUIVALENT<br />

APPROVED.<br />

19


1. General<br />

Measurement & Payment Methods For Electrical & Communications Installations<br />

a. All items shall be regarded as inclusive of "Supply" and "Installation", with the exception of those items where<br />

"Supply Only" or "Installation Only" is specified expressly. "Installation Only" should be read as inclusive of<br />

the costs of transporting the accessory/system in question from the location where it had been supplied to the<br />

contractor, storage for same, and full responsibility for its serviceability until the installation in question has<br />

been delivered to the client.<br />

b. All signing required for identifying the various accessories or for providing operating instructions, etc., shall be<br />

included in the supply and installation costs of the part to which the signing in question refers.<br />

c. Prices should also include the value of all accessories and auxiliary materials which had not been measured<br />

separately, such as fittings, hangers, brackets, supports, terminals, cable shoes, clamps, all kinds of<br />

reinforcing/attaching hardware, nails, screws, bolts, also prices should include covering of all electrical pipes<br />

installed below tiles with concrete layer to protect them.<br />

d. Prices for all works should also include the value of painting operations as specified, testing and repairs, trial<br />

runs, etc.<br />

e. Service and Spare Parts<br />

1) The contractor must submit a warranty certificate for the quality of the products supplied, for a<br />

minimum period of one year from the date in which the installation has been approved and accepted,<br />

as well as written undertaking for supplying repair and maintenance services if so required, for a<br />

minimum period of 5 years from the date in which the installation has been accepted.<br />

2) The contractor must supply spare parts as required by the drawings or as instructed by the supervisor.<br />

f. Electrical Connections<br />

g. Connections of all cables and electrical accessories including switchboards, lighting fixtures, etc., shall be<br />

included in the installation prices for these elements, and will merit no separate payment. Connection to motors<br />

or electrical installations supplied by other contractors shall be measured separately, complete.<br />

20


h. Painting & Coating<br />

The prices for painting and coating of the various equipment items and installations, as required by the General<br />

<strong>Specifications</strong>, the special specifications or the drawings, including paint touch-ups and repairs, shall be<br />

included in the supply and/or installation prices of these equipment items and installations.<br />

i. Reference to Product Brand Names<br />

Any references made to specific product brand names are merely intended to indicate the quality standards of<br />

the required product, and must not be regarded as compulsory or binding. The contractor will be allowed to<br />

suggest products which he considers to be on a par with those specified, however in any event, the planner and<br />

supervisor's approval must be obtained.<br />

The various items of the Bill of Quantities and/or specifications do not include the definition "or approved<br />

equivalent" following the specific manufacturer or brand name specified. The paragraphs where manufacturer<br />

or brand-names have been specified should be read as inclusive of the suffix "or approved equivalent"<br />

following the brand-name or manufacturer's name specified.<br />

When suggesting an equivalent product, the contractor must submit, in addition to an actual sample, relevant<br />

catalogues and brochures, and any other certificates as required by the supervisor and planner.<br />

j. Prices of all required junction boxes and pull boxes used to facilitate electrical connections are to be included<br />

in the unit rates of the points with no additional cost, the contractor should note that he must arrange all<br />

electrical installation in a proper way so as to use the minimum number of such junction boxes and pull boxes.<br />

2. Electrical Switchboards<br />

a. Switchboard prices must include switches circuit breakers and all switchboard structural elements, bus-bars,<br />

terminal strips, "press-on" type aluminum - copper conductor terminals, tapping insulators, bus - bar system<br />

insulators, complete signing for the switchboard, installation, connection of all cables and leads to the<br />

switchboard, as well as piping covers at switchboard entrance. All prices of switchboard accessories must<br />

include installation and connection of said accessories in the switchboard.<br />

b. Socket Panels<br />

Prices of socket panels must include all details as specified in the specifications and drawings, with all<br />

accessories thereof. Socket panels may be measured as units or complete.<br />

3. Installations<br />

a. Profiles<br />

Profile prices must include all details as specified in the specifications. The Bill of Quantities specifies the<br />

profile length. Profiles shall be measured in units. Profiles and various reinforcing/attaching hardware items,<br />

which are included in the specifications and unit prices for other items or completes shall not be measured<br />

separately.<br />

b. Connection of Electrical and/or Telephone Piping to the Building<br />

1) Piping prices must include all details as specified in the specifications, as well as installation.<br />

Pipes shall be measured in meters (length) long their axis - No. Separate or additional payment may be allowed<br />

for bends of any type.<br />

2) Prices include excavations for piping and consist of:<br />

a. Excavation to the depth and width as specified in the drawings.<br />

b. 10 cm thick sand bedding around the pipes.<br />

c. Refilling and placement of marker tape (danger).<br />

3) Connections of pipes to underground manholes must be included in the piping prices.<br />

21


4) Connections of pipes to buildings must be included in the piping prices.<br />

c. Pipes<br />

All pipes for the electrical and communication installation and all parts thereof must be of the heavy,<br />

bendable, self - extinguishing type. Pipes of the same type shall be measured as part of the same item, without<br />

differentiating between pipes attached to structural elements and those installed inside cast concrete elements.<br />

Pipe prices must include the supply, installation and Nylon drawstrings in "reserved" or pre-assigned pipes.<br />

The above shall only apply if the pipes are not expressly included in the prices of specific points or completes.<br />

d. Cables and Leads<br />

Prices of cables and leads must include all details as specified in the specifications, as well as all connectors,<br />

reinforcing attaching hardware, terminals, cable shoes, clamps, etc., required for their installation. All cables<br />

shall be measured in meters (length). The above shall only apply if the cables are not expressly included in the<br />

prices of specific points or completes.<br />

e. Passage Sleeves in Concrete Walls<br />

Sleeve prices must include all details as specified in the specifications. Measurement shall be complete for<br />

each sleeve/pipe, or in meters (length).<br />

f. Underground Manholes<br />

Prices for underground manholes must include all operations and materials required in order to install each<br />

manhole, including B-300 type reinforced concrete (in accordance with the General <strong>Specifications</strong> for On-Site<br />

Cast concrete Works), frames and covers, excavation, bottom bedding, drainage pits and sealing of piping<br />

connections.<br />

g. Digging and/or Excavation Operations<br />

Digging and/or excavation operations for underground cables or piping shall be included in the prices of the<br />

pipes and cables which are to be installed in these excavations, the depth and width specified, including sand<br />

bedding, covering with bricks, refilling, marker tapes, compacting, removal of excess earth and restoration of<br />

area to its previous condition.<br />

i. Testing of Installation<br />

i. Ducts<br />

j. Points<br />

Work prices must include all details as specified in the "Installation Testing, Trial Run and<br />

Acceptance" section of the General <strong>Specifications</strong>. Testing and approval by the Electrical Co. and<br />

all other tests must be included in the relevant unit prices, with no additional cost.<br />

Ducts shall be measured in meters (length). Duct prices must include the covers and all profiles, supports and<br />

reinforcements required in order to install these ducts in any way required.<br />

1) Wall, Ceiling or False Ceiling Mounted Lighting Point Normal or Water Proof or Halogen Spot Light<br />

Each outlet for the installation of a lighting fixture on the ceiling or wall or truss shall be measured as one<br />

point. Price is to include a 16 mm or 23 mm diameter pipe and leads with a cross-section of 1.5 sq.mm, or<br />

3x1.5 NYY type cable, installed under the plastering, leading from the applicable electrical board to the point,<br />

regardless of the distance between the board and the point, an outlet for the lighting fixture in the form of an<br />

under-plaster junction box, as well as a plastic light switch of any type, either single, double, two-way,<br />

22


changeover, water-tight, a push - button to activate a step relay, or switch panels. Accessories shall be as<br />

manufactured by "Gewiss" 20 Eurosystem range type. All auxiliary accessories, including common passage<br />

boxes, must be included in the point price. For halogen spot lights same as above is said except that prices shall<br />

include wires of different sizes up to a cross section of 10sq.mm so as to be enough for the 12V supplied to<br />

such points depending on the number of these halogen lamps fed from the same line.<br />

2) Lighting Point in Boiler, Laundry Rooms and Kitchen<br />

Each outlet for the installation of a lighting fixture in the boiler room, laundry room and the kitchen shall be<br />

measured as one point. Price is to include a 16 mm or 23 mm diameter pipe and leads with a cross-section of<br />

1.5 sq.mm, or 3x1.5 NYY type cable, installed inside a designated profile for the installation of fluorescent<br />

lighting fixture (Measured separately), leading from the applicable electrical board to the point, regardless of<br />

the distance between the board and the point, mounted over the plastering, down to armored, water-tight light<br />

switches, including co-ordination of the final location of the lighting fixture outlets in accordance with the<br />

actual placement of the equipment and machinery in the room (i.e. air-conditioning system, sanitary<br />

installations, generator, etc…).<br />

3) Outdoor Lighting Point<br />

Each outlet for the installation of an outdoor light point or on one of the external walls of the building as<br />

indicated in the drawings shall be measured as one point. Price is to include a 23mm diameter pipe or sections<br />

of PVC (MERIRON) or galvanized pipes where the cables cannot be routed through the normal piping, plus<br />

armored, water tight passage boxes and 3x2.5 NYY, or 5x2.5 NYY cables. Prices must include connection to<br />

switch panel and to the switchboard regardless of the distance between the switch panel, switchboard and the<br />

point. Switches are also included in the unit price as manufactured by “ Gewiss “ 20 Eurosystem range.<br />

4) External Lighting Point For Lighting Poles:<br />

Each outlet for the installation of a light pole into the external pavement or into the external basket court as<br />

indicated in the drawings shall be measured as one point. Price is to include a 23mm or 29mm, 2-inch or 3-inch<br />

flexible spiral pipe and 3x4 NYY, 5x4NYY, 5x6 NYY or 5x10 NYY cables to be buried in the ground. Prices<br />

include excavation, lying, and backfilling in the way described into the specifications. Connection to<br />

switchboard and connections between switchboard and switch panel concerning external lighting regardless of<br />

the distance, switches as manufactured by “Gewiss” 20 Eurosystem range are all included in the point price.<br />

5) Lighting Point for Operating Lamp in Operating Theater<br />

Each outlet for an operational lamp is to include a 23 mm diameter pipe and 3x6 sq. mm leads, or 3x6 NYY<br />

cable, leading from the applicable electrical board to the point, a 25A 2 pole switch installed under the<br />

plastering inside the operating theater. Each outlet for an operating lamp in the ceiling must include all<br />

installation accessories and attaching hardware in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, as well as<br />

any other auxiliary accessories and materials required in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.<br />

6) 220 Volts Emergency Lighting Point & Orientation Sign<br />

Price is to include the same as listed above for the standard wall or ceiling-mounted lighting points, plus an<br />

additional 1.5sq. mm<br />

7) Standard Wall-Mounted Socket Outlet Point, Normal or Water Proof, or UPS Connected<br />

Each outlet for a 16A 3-contact wall-mounted socket accessory shall be measured as one point. Price is to<br />

include 16 mm diameter pipe and 3 x 2.5 sq. mm leads installed under the plastering, or a 3 x 2.5 NYY cable<br />

routed, in part, through cable duct (measured separately) and in part through 16mm or 23 mm diameter<br />

protective piping installed under the plastering, leading form the point to the applicable electrical board,<br />

regardless of the distance between the point and switchboard, and including a 16A 3-contact plastic socket<br />

outlet accessory such as manufactured by "Gewiss" 20 Eurosystem range type, standard or water-tight or<br />

23


special for UPS sockets, installed under the plastering at any height as required, and attached to the wall by<br />

means of screws, all connected, ready for use.<br />

8) Wall Mounted Socket Outlet Point for Electric Shaver<br />

Same as listed above for the standard wall-mounted socket outlet point, but with a specially designed electric<br />

shaver socket and an isolation transformer.<br />

9) Three Phase Socket Outlet Point<br />

Each outlet for connection of a three-phase 16A wall mounted socket shall be measured as one point. Price is<br />

to include a 5x2.5 NYY cable inside 23mm diameter conduit leading from the point to the applicable electrical<br />

switchboard, regardless of the distance between the point and switchboard. Price also includes a socket panel<br />

such as NISKO NI516 including a miniature automatic circuit breaker and on-off switch, or such as “Gewiss”<br />

Eurodin 66/67 IB range with three phase 16A industrial socket and on-off rotary switch.<br />

10) Supply Point for Automatic Door<br />

Point price is to include a 23mm diameter pipe and 3x2.5mm leads installed under the plastering, leading from<br />

the applicable electrical switchboard to an under-plaster junction box above the door, and 23mm diameter<br />

passage piping as well as the junction boxes required, all as indicated in the drawings.<br />

11) Supply Point for External Fan, 1 Phase<br />

Each outlet for connecting a single-phase exhaust fan shall be measured as one point. Price includes a 3x2.5<br />

NYY cable leading from the switchboard up to the roof inside a 23mm diameter pipe then through the cable<br />

duct on the roof then using a metal flexible pipe leading from the cable duct on the roof till the applicable point<br />

of exhaust fan regardless of the distance. Point also includes a double pole switch with an indication lamp<br />

including main line and switch connection to associated switchboard. Point is to terminate with armored,<br />

watertight 16A 2-pole circuit breaker, installed near the fan. All the above-mentioned parts are included into<br />

the unit price except the cable duct on roof, which is to be measured separately.<br />

12) Supply Point For Exhaust Fan, 3 Phase<br />

Ditto as item 11 above but, but 5x2.5 NYY cable instead of 3x2.5 and a single pole switch to activate<br />

contractor with indication lamp instead of the double pole switch with indication lamp.<br />

13) Single Phase Floor Power Supply Point for Machines<br />

Each main line coming from the switchboard until a floor outlet in the building shall be measured as one point<br />

including the outlet. Price includes a 3x2.5 NYY cable passing through 23mm diameter conduit from the<br />

switchboard till the machine, which is to be connected, or till the working table which is to be supplied with<br />

power from the floor.<br />

14) Three Phase Floor Power Supply Point For Machines<br />

Ditto, as single phase above but 5 x 2.5 NYY cable instead of 3 x 2.5.<br />

15) Fan Coil Socket Outlet Point<br />

Same as listed above in item 7 for the standard wall-mounted socket outlet point, but ceiling mounted and a<br />

16A 3-contact surface mounted socket outlet accessory such as manufactured by NISKO.<br />

16) Socket Outlet Point in Communication Cabinet<br />

24


Point price is to include 16 mm diameter heavy, bendable type piping installed under the plastering, with 3 x<br />

2.5 sq.mm leads, or 3 x 2.5 NYY cable, leading from the switchboard to the point. Point is to terminate with a<br />

water -tight socket installed in the communications cabinet.<br />

17) Emergency Shut-off Push -Button Point (In Boiler Rooms)<br />

Point price is to include 16 mm diameter heavy, bendable type piping installed under the plastering, with 3 x<br />

2.5 sq.mm leads, or 3 x 2.5 NYY cable, leading from the switchboard to the push-button such as model XAS -<br />

E25 by “ Telemechanique “, red colored.<br />

18) Telephone Connection Point<br />

Each outlet for telephone connection shall be measured as one point. Price is to include a 23 mm diameter pipe<br />

with a 2 x 2 x 0.5 telephone cable installed under the plastering, leading to the telephone distribution frame in<br />

the communication cabinet or to the main communications duct, as well as an outlet with a plastic socket<br />

Gewiss 20 Eurosystem range type.<br />

19) Preparatory Point for Computer Terminal Connection<br />

Each outlet for computer terminal connection shall be measured as one point. Price is to include a 16 mm<br />

diameter pipe with a 2 mm diameter Nylon drawstring, installed under the plastering, leading to the computer<br />

section in the communications cabinet, or to the main computer hub. Point is to terminate with a junction box<br />

installed under the plastering with “ Gewiss “ Eurosystem 22-24 range plates and supports.<br />

20) Preparatory Point for Public Address System Connection<br />

Each loudspeaker outlet of the public - address system shall be measured as one point. Price is to include a 16<br />

mm diameter pipe with Nylon drawstring, leading to the Public-Address section in the communications<br />

cabinet, as well as the preparation of an under-plaster junction box at the outlet, including terminal boxes as<br />

required.<br />

21) Preparatory Point For Fire Detection & Fire Alarm System Connection<br />

Each outlet for fire/smoke detector, detector indicator lamp, outlet for emergency push-button or alarm horn,<br />

shall be measured as one point. Price is to include 16 mm diameter heavy, bendable type piping under the<br />

plastering with drawstrings, leading from the fire detection section in the communications cabinet to the point,<br />

as well as the preparation of an under-plaster junction box at the outlet, including terminal boxes as required.<br />

22) T.V Antenna Connection Point<br />

Each outlet for TV antenna connection shall be measured as one point. Point price is to include a 23 mm<br />

diameter pipe with a 75-ohm coaxial cable drawn in the pipe under the plastering leading from the TV section<br />

of the communications cabinet to the point. Point is to terminate with an under-plaster junction box, which is to<br />

accept a TV antenna socket.<br />

T.V antenna socket shall be Gewiss 20 Eurosystem range type.<br />

4. Grounding and Protective Devices<br />

a. The price of the foundation earthing welding for the building is to include all the details as specified in the<br />

specifications and drawings, and shall be measured complete, for the entire building.<br />

b. Connection of a potential-equalizing bus -bar to the outlets from the foundation grounding is to be included in<br />

the price for the bus bar.<br />

c. Installation Grounding System<br />

The price of the grounding system is to include all the materials and operations necessary to ensure proper<br />

grounding, such as: leads with the cross-section specified, protective piping, terminals, clamps, excavation (in<br />

the event that connection to underground water piping is carried out outside the building), etc. Grounding<br />

25


conductor length- as required. The grounding system shall be measured complete, regardless of the actual<br />

length of the piping and leads.<br />

d. Grounding of Electrical Switchboards or Grounding Bus-bars to Water Piping or Other Metal Elements<br />

The price of the grounding system is to include all the materials and operations, necessary to ensure proper<br />

grounding such as: leads with the cross -section specified, protective piping, terminals, clamps, etc. Grounding<br />

length- as required, including connection & signing, all to be measured complete, regardless of actual length of<br />

the piping and leads.<br />

5. Lighting Fixtures<br />

Prices for lighting fixtures shall include all details as specified in the specifications, with all parts and<br />

accessories thereof, including lamps, tubes and all auxiliary operations and materials required for the operation<br />

and perfect installation of the lighting fixtures to ceilings, walls or metal structural elements, including any<br />

required cross beams or hangers used to fix or support light fixtures into areas where there are trusses as the<br />

workshops areas, or for their incorporation in acoustic ceilings, as well as hangers to attach the lighting fixtures<br />

to the ceilings. Lighting fixtures shall be measured separately in units. If otherwise specified, the supply and<br />

installation of the lighting fixtures shall be measured and priced separately.<br />

26

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!